SECTION 1 - Dealer E Process

’07Camry hybrid_U (L/O 0610)

1

2007 CAMRY HV from Oct. ’06 Prod. (OM33749U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSHybrid vehicle overviewToyota hybrid system 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel consumption indicators 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy monitor 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your hybrid vehicle 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Efficient use of your hybrid vehicle 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions for the use of hybrid vehicle 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road accident cautions 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel overview 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering switches and overhead console overview 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1


2


Toyota hybrid system combines thepower of an engine and a traction mo-tor to minimize fuel consumption andemissions.

Depending on driving conditions, the ve-hicle runs optimally on a combination ofthe engine and traction motor.

Since the engine charges the hybrid bat-tery as needed, the battery does not haveto be charged from an outside source likean electric vehicle.

In your hybrid vehicle, there are severalindicators that show different aspectsof fuel consumption:

Instrument cluster indicators

1. Current fuel consumption (fuel economymeter): See “Fuel economy meter” in Section1−6 on page 133.

2. Average fuel consumption after refuel-ing (“TANK AVG”): See “—Outside temperature and cruiseinformation” in Section 1−6 on page135.

3. Average fuel consumption after the hy-brid system is turned on (“ECO DRIVELEVEL”): See “—Outside temperature and cruiseinformation” in Section 1−6 on page135.

Toyota hybrid system Fuel consumption indicators


3


Navigation system indicators (models withnavigation system only)

1. Transition of fuel consumption in thepast 30 minutes (“Consumption”): See “Trip information (with navigationsystem)” in Section 1−10 on page 255.

2. Best fuel economy (lowest fuel con-sumption) among average (“Best”): See “Trip information (with navigationsystem)” in Section 1−10 on page 255.

3. Average fuel consumption (“Average”):See “Trip information (with navigationsystem)” in Section 1−10 on page 255.

Toyota hybrid system performs variouscontrols depending on the operatingcondition. The condition appears on themulti−information display and/or naviga-tion system screen (with navigationsystem) when the display and/or screenis in “Energy Monitor” mode. See“—Outside temperature and cruise in-formation” on page 135 in Section 1−6and “Trip information” on page 255 inSection 1−10 for the operation of thedisplay and screen.

These are representative examples ofenergy monitor displays. Depending onthe condition, the energy monitor dis-plays the graphics different from thoseshown below. Depending on conditions,the graphic does not reflect the actualmotion of the vehicle.

Multi−information display

Navigation system screen

� When the vehicle is powered only bythe traction motor.

Energy monitor—


4




� When the vehicle is powered by boththe engine and the traction motor.



� When the vehicle is powered only bythe engine.



� When the vehicle is regenerating andcharging the hybrid battery.


5




� When there is no energy flow.

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

StatusMulti−

informationdisplay

Navigationsystemscreen

Level 0

Your vehicle is equipped with a pushstart system. Follow the procedure be-low to start the hybrid system:

1. Make sure that you are carrying theelectronic key.

2. Make sure that the transmission is inthe “P” position.

3. Press the “POWER” switch briefly andfirmly with the brake pedal depressed.

The “READY” light starts flashing and thenit stays on with sounding a beep. If theambient temperature is low, such as dur-ing winter driving conditions, it may takelonger than the usual amount of time untilthe “READY” light stays on.

The hybrid system cannot be started with-out the brake pedal depressed.

For details, see “How to start the hybridsystem” on page 301 in Section 3.

The engine may not start even with the“READY” light on.

—Hybrid battery status Starting your hybrid vehicle


6


Drive your vehicle with smooth accel-eration and deceleration.

� While driving, energy is recoveredthrough the regenerative brake as thevehicle decelerates. However, for effi-cient use, do not accelerate or deceler-ate your vehicle more than necessary.

� Avoid abrupt acceleration and decelera-tion.

� The power of the hybrid battery can bechecked on the multi−information dis-play or the navigation system screen(with navigation system). See “—Hybridbattery status” on page 5 for details.Gradual or non−abrupt acceleration anddeceleration will make more effectivelyuse of the traction motor without hav-ing to use engine power.

When parking, be sure to put the trans-mission into the “P” position. Whiledriving, put the transmission into the“D” position.

� In the “N” position, the engine operatesbut electricity cannot be generated. Thehybrid battery will be discharged requir-ing unnecessary engine power to re-charge.

� The hybrid system automatically re-charges the hybrid battery when theremaining battery power is reduced.However, the hybrid battery cannot berecharged if the transmission is in the“N” position.

For detailed information, see “How to savefuel and make your vehicle last longer” onpage 311 in Section 3.

INFORMATION

The engine starts and stops automati-cally. (It stops during a low load driv-ing, deceleration or when the vehicleis stopped.)

As long as the “READY” light remainson, you can start your vehicle usingthe traction motor even with the en-gine stopped.

The engine may not stop automatical-ly in the following conditions:

� During engine warm−up

� During hybrid battery charging

� During low or high hybrid batterytemperature

Efficient use of your hybridvehicle


7


1. Air conditioning compressor

2. Inverter unit

3. High voltage cables

4. Hybrid battery and DC/DC converter

5. Service plug

6. Traction motor, transaxle and motorgenerator

The hybrid system uses high voltage upto 650 V. High voltage components areindicated in the illustration above. Highvoltage cables are orange. The systemcan be hot while and after starting. Becareful of both the high voltage and thehigh temperature.

Precautions for the use of hybrid vehicle——High voltage components


8


Caution label

CAUTION

The vehicle has high voltage DC andAC systems as well as a 12−volt sys-tem. DC and AC high voltage is verydangerous and can cause severeburns and electric shock that may re-sult in death or serious injury.

� Never touch, disassemble, removeor replace the high voltage parts,cables and their connectors. Highvoltage parts and cables are indi-cated in the illustration above.Touching, disassembling, removingor replacing those parts and cablescan cause severe burns or electricshock that may result in death orserious injury.

� The hybrid system uses high volt-age and the system can be hotwhile and after starting. Be carefulof both the high voltage and thehigh temperature. Obey the cautionlabels attached to the vehicle.

� Never try to open the service plugaccess hole located in the trunk.The service plug is used only whenthe vehicle is serviced and is sub-ject to high voltage. Touching theservice plug can cause severeburns or electric shock that mayresult in death or serious injury.


9


Be sure to put the transmission in the“P” position when parking.

In the “N” position, the hybrid batterydoes not recharge, even if the engine isoperating. Leaving the transmission in the“N” position for an extended period of timemay discharge the hybrid battery. The ve-hicle cannot run if the hybrid battery isdischarged.

When you leave your vehicle, apply theparking brake, put the transmission inthe “P” position, be sure to carry thekey with you and lock all the doors.

If you leave the “POWER” switch at“ACC” or “ON”, the 12 volt battery will bedischarged and the hybrid system may notstart.

� Because the vehicle is powered byboth the engine and the traction motor,you may hear a motor sound comingfrom the engine compartment. However,this does not indicate any trouble.

� When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery behind the rearseats. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

� When the hybrid system is started orstopped, or while the vehicle is idling,you may hear a sound coming from thetransmission. However, this does notindicate any trouble.

� When accelerating rapidly, the enginenoise may rise. However, this does notindicate any trouble.

� Repeated acceleration consumes hybridbattery power, resulting in poor accel-eration. Battery power can be restoredby driving with the accelerator pedalslightly released.

� When applying brakes, you may heara sound coming from the motor genera-tor. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment when the driver’s door isopened or the brake pedal is de-pressed with the hybrid system turnedoff. However, this does not indicate anytrouble.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment after the hybrid system isturned on or off. However, this doesnot indicate any trouble.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment when the brake pedal isdepressed repeatedly with the hybridsystem turned on. However, this doesnot indicate any trouble.

� When the engine is started or stoppedwith the hybrid system turned on, youmay feel a vibration. However, thisdoes not indicate any trouble.

� If the “READY” light is on, you canstart even when the engine is off.

� When you put the transmission in the“B” position and take your foot off theaccelerator pedal, engine braking willbe applied. However, during high speeddriving you may feel that engine brak-ing is less effective than that of con-ventional vehicle.

—The characteristics of thehybrid vehicle


10


� High voltage parts and cables onthe hybrid vehicles emit approxi-mately the same amount of electro-magnetic waves as the convention-al gasoline powered vehicles orhome electronic appliances despiteof their electromagnetic shieldings.

Unwanted noise may occur in thereception of the mobile two−wayradio.

� If the vehicle is parked for a longtime, the hybrid battery will dis-charge gradually. To keep the hy-brid battery in good condition,drive the vehicle at least once ev-ery several months for at least 30minutes or 10 miles. If the hybridbattery becomes fully dischargedand the vehicle will not start evenwith a jump start to the 12 voltbattery, contact your Toyota dealer-ship.

CAUTION

� The driver should pay special atten-tion to pedestrians when the vehicleis powered only by the traction mo-tor. Because there is no enginenoise, the pedestrians may mis-judge the vehicle’s movement.

� When you leave your vehicle, besure to turn off the hybrid system.

� Be sure to put the transmission inthe “P” position because the ve-hicle can move when the “READY”light is on even if the engine isstopped. When the “READY” light ison, do not leave your vehicle in ashift position other than the “P”and “N” positions. The vehicle willcreep and start abruptly if the ac-celerator pedal is depressed bymistake. This may cause death orserious injury.




11


If you open the door with the hybridsystem turned on and the transmissionis not in the “P” position, a messageappears on the multi−information dis-play and navigation system screen (forvehicles with navigation system).

� When you leave your vehicle, or stopor park for a while, put the transmis-sion in the “P” position.

� Charging the hybrid battery while driv-ing is important. In the “N” position,the hybrid battery will not be charged.Do not leave the transmission in the“N” position. The motor generator oper-ates in the “P”, “R”, “D” and “B” posi-tions. When you drive, put the trans-mission in the “D” or “B” position anddepress the accelerator pedal. Whendriving in a traffic jam, operate thevehicle in the “D” position to preventthe hybrid battery from being dischar-ged.

Hybrid battery air vent

An air vent is located behind the rearseats to cool the hybrid battery. If thevent is covered, the battery will over-heat resulting in reduced performanceof the hybrid system.

You may hear a noise from the air vent.

For vehicle repairs or maintenance, besure to consult your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle is beyond repair, contactyour Toyota dealer for assistance. Donot attempt to dispose of your vehicleby yourself.

CAUTION

� Do not wash the vehicle interior ortrunk. Because the hybrid battery islocated behind the rear seat, pour-ing the water over the battery cancause electric shock that may resultin death or serious injury.

� Your vehicle contains a sealed Nick-el−Metal hydride battery. If disposedof improperly, it is hazardous to theenvironment and there is a risk ofsevere burns and electrical shockthat may result in death or seriousinjury.

NOTICE

� Clean the air vent regularly to pre-vent the hybrid battery from over-heating.


12


� Do not put foreign objects over theair vent. The hybrid battery may beoverheated and damaged.

� Do not load a large amount of wa-ter such as an aquarium into thevehicle. If water spills over the hy-brid battery, the battery may bedamaged.

� Do not spill water over the air vent.This may adversely affect or dam-age the hybrid battery.


13


CAUTION

� Pull your vehicle off the road, putthe transmission in the “P” posi-tion, apply the parking brake, turnthe hybrid system off and carry thekey.

� In order to avoid death or seriousinjury, do not touch high voltagewiring, connectors or high voltageparts (inverter unit, hybrid batteryand etc.). High voltage parts andcables are indicated in the illustra-tion on page 7.

� If exposed electric wires are pro-truding inside or outside of yourvehicle, an electric shock may oc-cur. Never touch the electric wires.

� If fluid leaks or gets into someparts of the vehicle, never touch itbecause it may be strong alkalineelectrolyte from the hybrid battery.If it contacts your skin or eyes,wash it off immediately with a largeamount of water or if possible, bo-ric acid solution. Get immediatemedical attention in order to helpavoid serious injury.

� If a fire occurs in the hybrid ve-hicle, leave the vehicle as soon aspossible. Never use a fire extin-guisher that is not meant for elec-tric fires. Using a small amount ofwater may be also dangerous.

� If your vehicle needs to be towed,do it with the front wheels raised.If the wheels with the motor gener-ator are on the ground when tow-ing, the motor may continue to gen-erate electricity. This may cause theelectricity leakage. Depending onthe severity of the damage, electric-ity leakage may cause fire. See “Ifyour vehicle needs to be towed” onpage 327 in Section 4.

The emergency shut off system blocksoff the high voltage current and stopsthe fuel pump to minimize the risk ofthe electric leakage and the fuel leak-age when a certain level of impact isdetected by the impact sensor. If thesystem activates, your vehicle will notrestart. To restart the hybrid system,contact a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Check to see if there are exposedhigh voltage parts and cables. Nev-er touch the parts and cables. See“—High voltage components” onpage 7 in this Section for the loca-tions of the high voltage parts andcables.

� Inspect the ground under the ve-hicle. If you find that liquid hasleaked onto the ground, the fuelsystem may have been damaged.Leave the vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

Road accident cautions— —Emergency shut off system


14


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Power door lock switches

6. Power window switches

7. Glove box

8. Cup holder

9. Rear console box

10. Rear vents

11. Power outlet

12. Transmission selector lever

13. Seat heater switches

14. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lockrelease lever

15. Hood lock release lever

16. Parking brake pedal

17. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview


15


1. Headlight and turn signal switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Engine immobilizer system indicatorlight

4. Clock

5. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights and front passengerseat belt reminder light

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Audio system or navigation systemincluding audio system (For thenavigation system, see the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

8. Air conditioning controls

9. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

10. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch

11. AUX adapter

12. Power outlet

13. Auxiliary boxes

14. “POWER” switch

15. Air conditioning economy mode switch

16. Fuel filler door opener switch

17. Power rear view mirror control switches


16


1. Audio remote control switches

2. Climate remote control switches

3. Multi−information display control switch

4. Cruise control switch

5. Speech command switch

6. Telephone switches

Without moon roof

With moon roof

1. Personal lights

2. Interior light

3. Moon roof switches

4. Microphone

5. Auxiliary box

6. Garage door opener

7. Interior light switch

Steering switches andoverhead console overview�Steering switches �Overhead console


17


LN11126y

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Fuel economy meter

4. Transmission shift position indicatorlights

5. Speedometer

6. Fuel gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panellight control knob

8. Multi−information display

9. Driving ready light

Instrument cluster overview


18


Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

or

or

Electric power steering system warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1Brake system warning lights∗1

or

(redindicator)

(yellowindicator)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


19


Slip indicator light

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 150 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 176 in Sec-tion 1−7.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Turn signal indicator lights

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light

Headlight indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Driving ready light

Master warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1


20



21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart key system 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2


22


The key consists of an electronic keyand a mechanical key. The mechanicalkey is for emergency use. If the elec-tronic key does not operate, you canopen the driver’s door using the me-chanical key.

1. Electronic keys—These keys can lockor unlock all the doors and can openthe trunk by using the wireless remotecontrol function or entry function of thesmart key system.

2. Mechanical keys—These keys can lockor unlock the driver’s door and theglove box.

Spare keys should not be left in thecabin. In the event that a spare key isleft in the cabin, the smart key systemwill remain actuated even after thedoors have been locked. Under thesecircumstances, the trunk can be openedeven after the driver has exited andlocked the vehicle, increasing the dan-ger of theft. (Refer to “—Opening trunklid with smart key system” on page 47in this Section.)

To protect items locked in the trunk or theglove box when using valet parking, leavethe electronic key with the attendant. Keepthe mechanical key with you. For detailsabout locking the trunk opener switch, see“—Luggage security system” on page 49in this Section.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the electronickeys. These chips are needed to enablethe system to function correctly, so becareful not to lose these keys.

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance be-tween themselves and the smartkey system antennas, because theradio waves may affect the opera-tion of such devices. For the anten-na locations see “ANTENNA LOCA-TION” on page 34 in this Section.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the entry function canbe disabled. See “DISABLING THESMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 38in this Section.

Keys


23


NOTICE

When using a electronic key contain-ing a transponder chip, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Do not affix any material that cutsoff electromagnetic waves (such asa metal seal) on the electronic key.

� Do not knock the electronic keyhard against other objects.

� Do not leave the electronic key ex-posed to high temperatures for along period, such as on the dash-board or hood under direct sun-light.

� Do not put the electronic key inwater or wash it in an ultrasonicwasher.

� Do not keep the electronic key to-gether with the products emittingelectromagnetic waves such as acellular phone.

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

When you use the mechanical key, pushthe release button and take out the me-chanical key as shown. Be sure to put themechanical key back when not in use.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.


24


The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. The transpond-er chip in the key transmits an elec-tronic code to the vehicle. The hybridsystem will start only when the elec-tronic code in the chip corresponds tothe registered ID code for the vehicle.

The engine immobilizer system is automat-ically set when the “POWER” switch isturned off.

The indicator light will start flashing toshow that the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccur, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light remains on.

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the “POWER” switch isturned off.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

The engine immobilizer system is automat-ically canceled when you enter the vehiclecarrying an electronic key and press the“POWER” switch.

Even if the key battery is discharged, thehybrid system can be turned on. See“Smart key system” on page 32 in thisSection.

When the system is canceled, the indica-tor light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand electronic key. However, there is alimit to the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

Engine immobilizer system


25


For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

1. Indicator light

2. Lock switch

3. Alarm switch

4. Unlock switch

5. Trunk opener switch

Wireless remote control—


26


The wireless remote control function isdesigned to lock or unlock all thedoors, open the trunk lid, or activatethe alarm from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

When the switch is operated, the indicatorlight flashes once. If not, the battery maybe discharged. Replace the battery at theearliest opportunity.

Observe the following precautions to pre-vent damage the key.

� Do not leave the electronic key inplaces where the temperature becomeshigh such as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

If the wireless remote control functiondoes not actuate the doors, or does notoperate from a normal distance, or if theindicator on the key is dimmed or doesnot come on:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the key.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the key. To re-place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-tery” on page 30 in this Section.

If you lose your key, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible to avoid thepossibility of theft, or an accident. (See “Ifyou lose your keys” on page 330 in Sec-tion 4.)

It is possible to disable the wireless re-mote control system. For details, contactyour Toyota dealer.


This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



27


NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlockingdoors


28


To lock or unlock all the doors, pushthe switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All thedoors are locked simultaneously. At thistime one beep will sound and turn signallights flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,or if the key is left in the vehicle, lockingcannot be performed by the lock switchand a beep will sound continuously for 10seconds.

To stop the beep, take out the key fromthe vehicle or push the unlock switch.

The answerback function (the turn signalflash and the beep) can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once tounlock the driver’s door alone. Pushingthe switch twice within 3 seconds unlocksall the doors simultaneously. Each timethe unlock switch is pushed, two beepswill sound and turn signal lights flashtwice.

This double switch operation to unlock alldoors can be changed to a single switchoperation. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

If the “POWER” switch is set at ACC orON, the vehicle cannot be unlocked viathe unlock switch.

You have 60 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all thedoors will be automatically locked again.

If the wireless remote control is used tolock the doors near the window or doorhandle, there is a possibility that the doormay not unlocked by entry function ofsmart key system. Under these circum-stances, use the wireless remote controlfunction to unlock the doors.

The automatic locking time can also beset to 30 seconds. For details, contactyour Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

When you unlock doors using the wirelessremote control, the illuminated entry func-tion will be activated. (For further informa-tion, see “Illuminated entry system” onpage 127 in Section 1−5.)

To open the trunk lid, push the trunkopener switch of the electronic key for1 second. A long beep will sound.

If the “POWER” switch is set at ACC orON, the trunk lid cannot be opened by thetrunk opener switch.

—Opening trunk lid


29


Opening of the trunk lid with the wirelessremote control can be changed as follows.Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

� Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunkopener switch twice in succession.

� Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunkopener switch once regardless of howlong the switch is being pressed.

� Opening of the trunk lid with the wire-less remote control function is dis-abled.

Pushing the switch blows the horn in-termittently and flashes the exteriorlights and interior light.

When pushing the switch, the indicatorlight flashes.

The alarm switch is used to deter vehicletheft when you witness anyone attemptingto break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopthe alarm midway, push the switch onceagain, unlock a door with the wirelessremote control function, or set the“POWER” switch at ON.

If the “POWER” switch is set at ACC orON, the alarm does not work.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Activating alarm


30


The electronic key can easily be damagedwhen replacing the battery. We recom-mend having the battery replaced by yourToyota dealer. If you have to do it your-self, use a CR1632 lithium battery orequivalent and a flathead screwdriver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to touch the circuit,as this may generate static electric-ity that can damage the key.

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the battery by following theseprocedures:

1. Push the release button and take outthe mechanical key.

2. Using a flathead screwdriver or equiva-lent, open the key case.

—Replacing battery


31


3. Remove the discharged battery by flat-head screwdriver or equivalent. Insertthe guide groove and lift as shown inthe above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not modify the battery case. Itmay cause a trouble.

4. Put in a new battery with the positive(+) side up. Close the case securelyand insert the mechanical key.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the battery arefaced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the key, or it may in-terfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the battery and thatdust or oils do not adhere to thecase.

� Close the case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thekey operates properly. If the electronic keystill does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.


32


The smart key system consists mainlyof the following functions.

� Engine immobilizer function (For de-tails, see “Engine immobilizer system”on page 24 in this Section.)

� Wireless remote control function (Fordetails, see “Wireless remote control”on page 25 in this Section.)

� Push button start function (For details,see “How to start the hybrid system”on page 301 in Section 3.)

� Entry function and start function (See“ENTRY FUNCTION AND STARTFUNCTION” described below.)

� Steering lock function (See “STEERINGLOCK FUNCTION” described below.)

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance be-tween themselves and the smartkey system antennas, because theradio waves may affect the opera-tion of such devices. For the anten-na locations see “ANTENNA LOCA-TION” on page 34 in this Section.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the entry function canbe disabled. See “DISABLING THESMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 38in this Section.

Entry function

Start function

Smart key system


33


ENTRY FUNCTION AND STARTFUNCTION

Simply by carrying the key, you canlock and unlock the doors and start thehybrid system.

Entry function—You can lock and unlockthe doors and open the trunk without in-serting the key in the keyholes. For fur-ther information, see “Side doors” on page38 and “Trunk lid” on page 47 in thisSection.

Start function—You can shift the powersupply mode and start the hybrid systemwhen the electronic key is in the vehicle.For further information, see “‘POWER’switch” on page 160 in Section 1−7 and“How to start the hybrid system” on page301 in Section 3.

If the smart key system does not oper-ate properly because of a system mal-function, consult your Toyota dealer.Make sure to bring all of the keys. Theymay be necessary to repair the system.

STEERING LOCK FUNCTION

When the driver’s door is opened afterturning off the hybrid system, the steeringwheel will lock.

The steering lock is automatically un-locked when the “POWER” switch ispressed. If the indicator light on the“POWER” switch flashes green, this indi-cates that the steering wheel remainslocked. If the amber indicator light flashes,this indicates that the steering lock is mal-functioning. For details, see “How to startthe hybrid system” on page 301 in Section3.


34


ANTENNA LOCATION

1. Antenna inside cabin and trunk

2. Antenna outside cabin and trunk

ACTUATION AREA

The entry function and start functionare available to use when a registeredkey is in the actuation area.

1. Entry function actuation area—About1 m (3 ft.) from each outside frontdoor handle and the trunk openerswitch

Only the door handle of the actuationarea that the key holder is in can beoperated.

If the key is close to the door handle,windows or the center of the rearbumper, on the ground or above theroof, the entry function may not beactivated.

2. Start function actuation area—Insideof the cabin

The start function may not be acti-vated, if the key is in the auxiliary boxof the driver’s side instrument paneland glove box, on the instrument pan-el, on the package tray, on the floor,etc.

In the following cases, the smart keysystem may not operate properly.

� When facilities issuing strong electro-magnetic waves such as TV towers,electric power stations, broad castingstations are nearby.

� In places where automated payment fa-cilities are installed (such as gas sta-tions).

� When you are carrying a electronic keytogether with a mobile communicationssystem such as a two−way radio orcellular phone.

� When the electronic key is in contactwith or covered by a metallic object.

� When another person is operating awireless remote control function onanother vehicle near your vehicle.

� When the battery is discharged. To re-place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-tery” on page 30 in this Section.


35


� When the electronic key is near ahigh−voltage or noise−emitting device.

� When you are carrying an electronickey together with a key for anothersmart key system equipped vehicle oranother instrument emitting radiowaves.

� Depending on the position of the keyor vehicle body shape, the key maynot work well even within the actuationarea.

� When the key surface is covered by asticker, etc. that may cut off electro-magnetic wave.

Even if the smart key system does notoperate properly, you can still enter andstart the hybrid system. For further infor-mation, see “Side doors” on page 38 and“Trunk lid” on page 47 in this Section, andsee “How to start the hybrid system” onpage 301 in Section 3.

STARTING THE HYBRID SYSTEM WHENTHE ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY ISDISCHARGED

If the key indicator does not flash andthe hybrid system cannot be started byusing the start function, the batterymay be discharged. Replace the keybattery as soon as possible. (See“—Replacing battery” on page 30 inthis Section.)

However the hybrid system can be turnedon in the following procedures.

1. While the brake pedal is depressed,touch the Toyota logo side of theelectronic key to the “POWER” switch.

2. Start the hybrid system within 5seconds after the green indicator lighton the “POWER” switch comes on anda buzzer sounds.

BATTERY POWER SAVING

Both the vehicle and key transmitters arealways sending signals to each other. Toprevent battery drain, the smart key sys-tem is automatically deactivated in the fol-lowing conditions:

� If the electronic key is left outside ofthe vehicle and within the effectiverange of the entry function actuationarea for more than 10 minutes.

� If the door lock or unlock operation isnot performed more than 2 weeks.

The key and the vehicle are communicat-ing even while the vehicle is not beingdriven. Do not leave the key near thevehicle (within 2 m [7 ft.]).

The vehicle battery may drain if thevehicle is not used for a long period oftime. To prevent battery drain, disconnectthe battery negative (−) terminal or disablethe smart key system. (For details aboutdisable the smart key system, see“DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM”in this Section.)


36


To reactivate the smart key system, per-form any of the following:

(a) Press the lock button on the front out-side door handle or trunk open buttonwhile carrying the electronic key.

(b) Perform a wireless remote control op-eration.

(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key inthe keyhole of the driver’s door.

If the electronic key receives strong elec-tromagnetic waves over a period of time,the battery can be drastically run down.You should always keep the followingelectrical appliances at least 1 m (3 ft.)away from the electronic key.

� TV

� Personal computer

� Cellular phone or cordless phone re-charger unit

� Electric light stand

� Fluorescent desk light


FCC ID: NI4TMLF−2



CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


37



This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.





� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.



Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.


38


DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM

The following functions can be disabled:

� A function that allows you to lock/un-lock the doors and open the trunk bysimply carrying a key

� A function that causes the vehicle tobeep if keys are forgotten inside thevehicle or trunk and a door is closed

� A function that recalls the position ofthe driver’s seat and side rear viewmirror

� A function that shifts the power supplymode and starts the hybrid systemwhen the electronic key is in the ve-hicle.

� Warning lights and buzzers

For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the smart key system does not oper-ate properly because of a system mal-function, consult your Toyota dealer.Make sure to bring all of the keys. Theymay be necessary to repair the system.

When you carry the registered key withsmart key system into the actuation area,you can lock and unlock the side doorswithout using the key. For further informa-tion of actuation area, see “Smart keysystem” on page 32 in this Section.

Locking operation

Push the lock button on the front out-side door handle slowly and firmly. Allthe doors lock simultaneously. At thistime one beep will be heard and turnsignal lights flash once.

For three seconds after the doors havebeen locked, the doors cannot be un-locked via the smart key system. Thisfeature allows the operator to confirm thatthe doors are locked.

In the following cases, the doors cannotbe locked by pushing the lock button anda beep will sound as an indicator.

Side doors——Locking and unlocking withsmart key system


39


� When any of the doors are not secure-ly closed. A beep will sound continu-ously for 10 seconds.

� When the lock button is pressed whileopening or closing the door. A beepwill sound continuously for 10 seconds.

� When the hybrid system is not turnedoff. A beep will sound continuously for2 seconds.

� When the key is left in the vehicle. Abeep will sound continuously for 2 sec-onds.

� When attempting to lock the doors withthe key near a window or a door han-dle. A beep will sound continuously for2 seconds.

The beep may not sound if the key is onthe instrument panel, on the package tray,in the glove box or on the floor, etc.


Unlocking operation

Grasp the front outside door handle(sensors are located on the undersideof the door handles). Only the driver’sdoor unlocks when the driver’s doorhandle is grasped. All the doors unlockwhen the front passenger’s door handleis grasped. At this time two beeps willbe heard and the turn signal lightsflash twice.

The doors may not unlock if the handleis grasped too quickly. Be sure to confirmthat the doors are unlocked before pullingthe door handle. If the doors do not openwhen the handle is pulled, return the han-dle to its original position.

Wearing gloves may slow response time.For three seconds after the doors havebeen locked, the doors cannot be re−un-locked via the smart key system.


When you enter the entry function actua-tion area, the interior and exterior lightscome on for about 15 seconds. After thelight comes on, all the side doors can beunlocked by grasping the outside doorhandle.

You have 60 seconds to open a door afterusing the unlocking function. If a door isnot opened by then, all the doors will beautomatically locked again.

The automatic locking time can also beset to 30 seconds. For details, contactyour Toyota dealer.

The doors may unlock if the key is withinthe entry function actuation area and alarge amount of water splashes on thedoor handle (for example, in the rain orin a car wash).

When you enter the entry function actua-tion area, the illuminated entry system willbe activated. (For further information, see“Illuminated entry system” on page 127 inSection 1−5.)


40


SELECTING DOORS TO BE UNLOCKEDWITH ENTRY FUNCTION

The unlocking operation has 2 modes.To change the mode, within 1 m (3 ft.)of the vehicle press the lock switch andthe alarm, trunk opener or unlockswitch simultaneously for five seconds.

The “POWER” switch must be turned off.

When the mode is changed, the buzzerwill sound and an indicator is displayed onthe multi−information display as follows:

Mode Door to beunlocked

Wirelessremotecontrolbuzzer

Indicatorand meter

buzzer

1 All doors 2 beeps1 beep

2

Driver’sdoor only(fromdriver’sdoorswitch)

All doors(from frontpassenger’s doorswitches)

3 beeps1 beep

Repeating the above process allows youto toggle between 1 and 2.

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handle even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

—Locking and unlocking withinside lock knob


41


Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Doors cannot be locked when either frontdoor is open and the key is left in thevehicle.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on theright side.To unlock: Push the switch down on theleft side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-ly.

When the front doors are locked from theoutside or locked with the wireless remotecontrol function, the power door lockswitch will not work until either front dooris unlocked with the key, lock knob, orwireless remote control function.

—Locking and unlocking withpower door lock switch


42


Insert the mechanical key into the key-hole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

All the doors lock simultaneously with thedriver’s door.

For three seconds after the doors havebeen locked, the doors cannot be un-locked via the smart key system. Thisfeature allows the operator to confirm thatthe doors are locked.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Turning the key once will unlock the driv-er’s door and twice in succession will un-lock all the doors simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the doors can be changed to asingle key turning operation. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

When you unlock the doors, the illumi-nated entry system will be activated. (Forfurther information, see “Illuminated entrysystem” on page 127 in Section 1−5.)

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

You can select the following functions:

� Locking linked with the shift position

All doors are automatically locked whenthe selector lever is moved out of “P”position.

� Locking linked with vehicle speed

All doors are automatically locked whenthe vehicle speed goes above about 20km/h (12 mph).

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor locking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.

—Locking and unlocking doorwith mechanical key

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions


43


To select the locking linked with theshift position:

1. Close all doors and set the “POWER”switch at ON.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the“POWER” switch on, press and holdthe driver’s side power door lockswitch in the lock position for 5 sec-onds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-eration again.

To select the locking linked with thevehicle speed:


2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the“POWER” switch on, press and holdthe driver’s side power door lockswitch in the lock position for 5 sec-onds and then release.



AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING

You can select the following functions:

� Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the selector lever is moved to“P” position.

� Unlocking linked with the “POWER”switch

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the driver’s door is opened within10 seconds after the “POWER” switchis set from ON to ACC or OFF.

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor unlocking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.


44


To select the unlocking linked with theshift position:


2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the“POWER” switch on, press and holdthe driver’s side power door lockswitch in the unlock position for 5 sec-onds and then release.



To select the unlocking linked with the“POWER” switch:

1. Close all doors and turn the “POWER”switch at ON.

2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the“POWER” switch on, press and holdthe driver’s side power door lockswitch in the unlock position for 5 sec-onds and then release.



Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

—Rear door child−protectors


45


CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each door.

The power windows work when the“POWER” switch is set at ON.

Key off operation: All windows work forabout 45 seconds even after the“POWER” switch is turned off. They stopworking when either front door is opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down and then release it. Thewindow will fully open. To stop the windowpartway, pull the switch up and then re-lease it.

Power windows


46


Windowlockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switches on the passengers’doors. The driver’s door also hasswitches that control the passengers’windows.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.


47


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the “POWER” switchset at ON. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

When you carry the registered key intothe actuation area, the trunk can beopened. For further information of actua-tion area, see “Smart key system” onpage 32 in this Section.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 295in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

To close the trunk lid, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the trunk lid, trypulling it up to make sure it is securelyclosed.

The trunk lid can be opened with the wire-less remote control function, see “—Open-ing trunk lid” on page 28 in this Section.

CAUTION

Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

A warning buzzer may sound when:

� The key is brought into the cabin afterthe trunk is opened, and the trunk isthen closed.

� The key is near the trunk when thetrunk is closed.

The buzzer may sound even when the keyis not in the trunk. This does not indicatea problem. However, under these circum-stances, the trunk cannot be opened usingthe smart key system. Open the trunkusing other methods.

Trunk lid——Opening trunk lid withsmart key system


48


If the trunk is closed with the key left inthe trunk when all side doors are locked,a beep will sound continuously for 2 sec-onds. You can open the trunk pushing thetrunk opener switch without carryinganother key. However, in some instances,the beep may not sound when the trunkis closed depending on the location of thekey in the trunk. In addition, when thedoors are open or unlocked, the beep maynot sound when the trunk is closed. Whenclosing the trunk, make sure that the keyis not left in it.

To open the trunk lid from the driver’sseat, pull up on the lock release lever.

To deactivate this lock release lever fromopening the trunk lid, see “—Luggage se-curity system” described below.

To open the trunk lid manually from theoutside, insert the mechanical key andturn it clockwise.

—Opening trunk lid by lockrelease lever

—Opening trunk lid withmechanical key


49


This system helps protect things lockedin the trunk by safeguarding the trunklid lock release lever from unwantedaccess.

Close the trunk lid. Insert the mechani-cal key and turn it counterclockwise todeactivate the trunk lid lock release le-ver.

After the operation, try pulling up on thetrunk lid lock release lever to make sureit is locked.

NOTICE

Implement the above steps to maxi-mize security of the luggage in thetrunk whenever the vehicle is unat-tended.

If a person is locked in the trunk,he/she can pull up the phosphorescentstrap on the inside of trunk lid to openthe trunk lid.

The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark)strap will continue to glow for a time afterthe trunk lid is closed. Exposing the han-dle to stronger light will cause it to glowlonger.

—Luggage security system —Internal trunk release strap


50


CAUTION

� Always lock the trunk lid and alldoors, and keep away the vehiclekeys out of children’s reach.

� Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle. Unsupervised childrenmay lock themselves in the vehicleor trunk and suffer serious injuriesor death.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

Hood


51


This indicates that the fuel filler door ison the left side of your vehicle.

To refuel your vehicle, turn the hybridsystem off.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allowopen flames in the area when refuel-ing. The fumes are flammable.

1. To open the fuel filler door, push theswitch.

If the pressure in the fuel tank is high, amessage “PLEASE WAIT NOW OPENING”will appear on the multi−information dis-play. It may take up to 10 seconds if theinternal pressure is high. The segments inthe display increase to indicate the timeleft. The segments in the display decreaseto indicate the time left.

When the pressure lowers, a message“REFUEL READY” will appear and the fuelfiller door will open.

If the fuel filler door does not open, theopener may have a malfunction. For de-tails, see “—If the fuel filler door openeris not actuated” on page 53 in this Sec-tion.

Fuel tank cap—


52


CAUTION

When opening the cap, do not removethe cap quickly. In hot weather, fuelunder pressure could cause injury byspraying out of the filler neck if thecap is suddenly removed.

2. Turn the cap slowly counterclockwiseand remove it.

The removed cap can be stored on thebackside of the fuel filler door.

When reinstalling, turn the cap clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp will come on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.The indicator lamp will go off after drivingthe vehicle several times. If the indicatorlamp does not go off, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

If you leave the fuel filler door open andstart the hybrid system, a message“CLOSE FUEL LID” will appear on themulti−information display. Make sure thefuel filler door is closed.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

Finish refueling within 30 minutes. Ifmore than 30 minutes passes, the in-ternal valve closes. In this condition,fuel may spill out if you continue torefuel the vehicle. About 5 minutesafter the valve is closed, a message“CLOSE FUEL LID” will appear on themulti−information display. To refuelthe vehicle again, tighten the fueltank cap and close the fuel fillerdoor, and then push the fuel fillerdoor opener switch again.


53


If the opener is not actuated, contactyour Toyota dealer to service the ve-hicle. If you must refuel your vehicle,you can open the fuel filler door manu-ally as instructed below.

The system to lower internal pressurein the fuel tank may not be functioningso you must turn the cap slowly withreleasing the pressure. In addition, fuelmay spill out during refueling. Fill thefuel tank carefully and slowly.

1. Open the trunk and remove the cov-er located in the left−hand side ofthe trunk.

2. Pull the manual lock release lever.

The fuel filler door will open.

3. Turn the cap slowly counterclock-wise.

You may hear a slight swoosh whenyou remove the cap.

CAUTION

When opening the cap, do not removeit quickly. The fuel may spray out ofthe filler opening if the cap is sud-denly removed.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

—If the fuel filler door openeris not actuated Electric moon roof


54


To operate the moon roof, use theswitches on the overhead console.

The moon roof works when the “POWER”switch is set at ON.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push and hold the switch for 1second toward the vehicle’s rear.

The roof will open and stop partway 90mm (3.6 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push the switch again, themoon roof will open fully. To stop the roofpartway, push one of the moon roofswitches briefly.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway90 mm (3.6 in.) from the fully openedposition.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push and hold the switch for 1second toward the vehicle’s front.

The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push one of themoon roof switches briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push and hold the “TILT” switchfor 1 second on the “UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push one of themoon roof switches briefly.

To tilt down: Push and hold the “TILT”switch for 1 second on the “DOWN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push one of themoon roof switches briefly.

Open moon roof reminder: If the moonroof is left open when you set the“POWER” switch at ACC or off and openthe driver’s door, a message“MOONROOF OPEN” appears on themulti−information display and a warningtone sounds.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, the moon roof works for about 45seconds even after the “POWER” switchis turned off. It stops working when eitherdoor is opened.

Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the moon roof andframe during closing operation, the moonroof stops and opens.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be killed or seri-ously injured if the vehicle stopssuddenly or if the vehicle is in-volved in an accident.


55


� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moon roof,first make sure it is safe to do so.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the “POWER” switchset at ON. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the moon roof switch and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.


56



57


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3


58


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be killedor severely injured in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,death or severe injuries can occurin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


59


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats. Suchchange may prevent the side airbagsystem from activating correctly,disable the system, or cause theside airbags to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions


60


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the seat, asthis might interfere with the seat move-ment.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH


Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting driver’s seat


61


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch in the desireddirection.

The amount of lumbar support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

2. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

—Adjusting front passenger’sseat (manual seat)


62


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH


Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

2. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING SWITCH


Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the seat, asthis might interfere with the seat move-ment.

—Adjusting front passenger’sseats (power seat)


63


FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

1. To unlock the seatback, pull the le-ver in the trunk.

2. Fold down the seatback.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

This will enlarge the trunk as far as theseatbacks. See “—Stowage precautions”on page 295 in Section 2 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

NOTICE

Make sure the luggage loaded in theenlarged trunk will not damage thewebbing of the rear center seat beltwhen the left seatback is foldeddown.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventdeath or serious injury in a collisionor sudden stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

Rear seats——Fold−down rear seat


64


To turn on the seat heater, push theswitch. At this time, the indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the seat heat-er is operating.

To turn off the seat heater, push theswitch once again.

The “POWER” switch must be set at ONto operate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for thefollowing:

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

� Persons who have sensitive skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, donot use the seat heater with a blan-ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, turn the switchoff when the hybrid system isturned off.

Seat heaters


65


Front

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it out asshown above.

Head restraints Armrest


66


Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 96 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal collision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or serious inju-ry.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions


67


� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 336in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Buckle

Tab

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 96 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


68


Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended event. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.


69


CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injures in a colli-sion.

Rear seat belts—

Use the seat belt after passing it throughthe guide if the seat belt comes free fromthe guide.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltpasses through the guide when us-ing the seat belt. Failure to properlyposition the belt may reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand could lead to serious injures ina collision or sudden stop.

� Always make sure that the seat beltis not twisted, does not get caughtin the guide or the seatback and isarranged in the proper position.


70


To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

The outside shoulder belt comfortguides for the rear seat outside posi-tions will provide added seat belt com-fort for children who have outgrownchild restraints and for small adults.When the outside shoulder belt is in-serted through the guide, the comfortguide pulls the belt away from the neckand head of an occupant.

To use the comfort guide, do as fol-lows.

Seat belt comfort guides are stored in theboth pockets on the sides of the rearseatback.

—Seat belt comfort guides


71


INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE

1. Pull out the comfort guide from thepocket.

2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulderbelt for the rear seat outside posi-tion with your fingers and slide thebelt past the slot of the guide asshown above. At this time, the elas-tic cord must be behind the seatbelt.

CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twisted andthat it lies flat. The elastic cord mustbe behind the belt and the guidemust be on the front.

3. Buckle, position and release the seatbelt. (For wearing the seat belt, see“—Fastening front and rear seatbelts” on page 67 in this Section.)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center of theshoulder. The belt should be keptaway from the neck, and should notfall off the shoulder. Failure to ob-serve these precautions could reducethe effectiveness of the seat belt inan accident, causing death or seriousinjury.


72


REMOVING AND STORING THECOMFORT GUIDE

Pinch the two edges of the seat belttogether so that you can slide them outof the guide. Store the guide with theelastic cord into the pocket.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, remove and store thecomfort guide in its pocket when it isnot in use.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer toorder the proper required length for theextender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-pect to wear for proper measurement andselection of length. Additional ordering in-formation is available at your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

—Seat belt extender


73


� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.


74


As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 92 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

—Seat belt pretensioners


75


The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights (for front passenger airbagand side airbag on the front passengerseat)

4. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.


76


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON. It goesoff after about 6 seconds. This meansthe seat belt pretensioners are operat-ing properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 150 in Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON or re-mains on for more than about 6 sec-onds.

� The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

� If any seat belt does not retract orcannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-tion or activation of the relevant seatbelt pretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.


77


In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor etc. The frontpassenger’s airbag system consists of thefront passenger occupant classificationsensor etc.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead, chest or knee caused by hitting thevehicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 92 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

SRS airbags——SRS driver airbag, driverknee airbag and frontpassenger airbag


78


CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 66 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 96 in thisSection.

The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.


79


Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)



6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch


80


7. Driver’s seat position sensor


9. Knee airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)


The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon−toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to; avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, lower portion of driver’s side instru-ment panel, airbag cover and inflator) maybe hot for several minutes after deploy-ment, so do not touch! The airbags inflateonly once. The windshield may be dam-aged by absorbing some of the force ofthe inflating airbag.


81


CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel, lowerportion of driver’s side instrumentpanel or dashboard during airbag de-ployment can be killed or seriouslyinjured. Toyota strongly recommendsthat:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page58 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 96 in this Sec-tion.


82


� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard, lower portion of driver’sside instrument panel or steeringwheel pad that houses the front air-bag system. They might restrictinflation or cause death or seriousinjury as they are projected rear-ward by the force of the deployingairbags. Likewise, the driver andfront passenger should not hold ob-jects in their arms or on theirknees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag, driver knee air-bag or airbag sensor assembly. Do-ing so may prevent the front airbagsystem from activating correctly,cause sudden activation of the sys-tem or disable the system, whichcould result in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag


83


The indicator comes on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON. It goesoff after about 6 seconds. This meansthe SRS front airbags are operatingproperly.





The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.


84


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the 12 volt batterycables before contacting your Toyotadealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest, andthe SRS curtain shield airbags help re-duce injuries mainly to the driver’s, frontpassenger’s or rear outside passenger’shead.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled upregardless of the presence of the occu-pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-ger occupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 92 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or rear outsideseat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

—SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


85


CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and rear outside passen-ger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 66 in thisSection.

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front pillar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page96 in this Section.


86


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors


87


7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors



The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.


88


� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead close to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windows,since the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.


89


� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force, or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats. Suchchanges may prevent the side air-bag system from activating correct-ly, disable the system or cause theside airbags to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.


90


� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderails containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This indicator comes on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON. It goesoff after about 6 seconds. This meansthe SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are operating properly.


91








� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the 12 volt batterycables before contacting your Toyotadealer.


92


Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 94 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates the following systems;

� Front passenger airbag

� Side airbag on the front passengerseat

� Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect theconditions correctly, do not do any ofthe following:

� Apply a heavy load to the front pas-senger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-back pocket).

� Attach a commercial seatback table,etc. to the front passenger seat seat-back.

� Put weight on the front passenger seatby putting your hands or feet on theseatback from the rear passenger seat.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the “POWER” switch isset at ON with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when an adult isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, and with the seatbelt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-ther ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system


93


The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the “POWER” switch is setat ON. After about four seconds, theywill go off. After that, the front passen-ger occupant classification system op-erates and judges which indicator lightbe illuminated.

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.


94


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detectedby the front

passenger occupantclassification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

“AIRBAG ON” and“AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “AIRBAG OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated

Activated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 96 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)

∗4: In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.


95


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a rear seat as it may cause the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be il-luminated. If the seatback interfereswith the rear seat, return the seat-back to a position where it doesnot interfere with the rear seat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, which could cause deathor serious injury in the event ofcollision.

� If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should be illumi-nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illumi-nated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that isnot possible, move the frontpassenger seat fully rearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not apply a heavy load to thefront passenger seat or equipment(e.g. seatback pocket).


96


� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.

� When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Child restraint sys-tem” on page 98 in this Section.)

� Do not remove the seat.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” onpage 77 and “Child restraint” on page 96in this Section.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 66 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on age and sizeof the child. Holding a child in yourarms is not a substitute for a childrestraint system. In an accident, thechild can be crushed against thewindshield, or between you and thevehicle’s interior.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


97


� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbags and/orcurtain shield airbags inflate, andthe impact could cause death orserious injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.


98


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’s in-structions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit in the trunk or somewhere other thanthe passenger compartment. This will pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 109 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 111 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Child restraint system—Types of child restraintsystem


99


(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

—Installation with seat belt


100


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.


101


2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.


102


4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theappropriate age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Press the “POWER” switch and set itat ON.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.


103


CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the “POWER” switchis set at ON and the child is in the childrestraint system after following these pro-cedures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lightindicates the SRS front passenger airbagand side airbag on the passenger side willnot deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated, remove the child re-straint system and reinstall it with the hy-brid system turned off. If the “AIRBAGON” indicator light is illuminated when the“POWER” switch is set at ON, then theSRS front passenger airbag and side air-bag on the passenger side may deploy inan accident. Do not drive the vehicle inthis condition. Remove the child restraintsystem and contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.


104


Move seatfully back


� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and/orcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.


� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.


105


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.


106


3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.


107


(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

Move seatfully back

CAUTION


� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated ina child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and/orcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.


108


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 66 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.





109


2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor bracket on the packagetray behind the rear seat to attach the topstrap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of theanchor brackets.

—Using a top strap


110


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position.

2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 96 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.


111


Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems interfaced with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems interfaced with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed with these anchorages. Inthis case, it is not necessary to fix thechild restraint system with a seat belt onthe vehicle. Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


112


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 109 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.



113


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt and telescopic steering wheel 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4


114


To adjust the steering wheel position,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever. Then tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle, push or pullit to the desired steering column lengthand return the lever to its original posi-tion.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down or for-ward and rearward to make sure itis locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

On some models, when you push the rearwindow defogger switch, the heater panelsin the outside rear view mirrors will quick-ly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rearwindow and outside rear view mirror de-foggers” on page 129 in Section 1−5.)

Tilt and telescopic steeringwheel Outside rear view mirrors—


115


CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, do not touch them when thedefogger switch is on.

NOTICE

The outside rear view mirrors arefixed in place. Do not try to fold themirrors. It may damage the mirrors.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the“POWER” switch is set at ACC or ON.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


116


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the “POWER” switch is set at ON,the inside rear view mirror always turnson in the automatic function mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror


117


In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off and on the automatic function,push the “AUTO” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

To use the vanity mirror, swing downthe sun visor and slide the cover.

On some models—The lights come onwhen you slide the cover.

Vanity mirrors


118



119


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated entry system 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 129. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5


120


HEADLIGHTS

Manual operation—

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The headlight indicator lights up in theinstrument cluster.

When the tail lights/headlights are turnedon, the brightness of the instrument clus-ter will be reduced slightly unless the in-strument panel light control knob is turnedfully clockwise.

However, the brightness of the instrumentcluster will not be reduced in daytimeeven when the tail lights/headlights areturned on.

Automatic operation—

To turn on or off the lights automatical-ly, twist the headlight/turn signal leverknob to the “AUTO” position when the“POWER” switch is set at ON.

The headlights and/or all of the lights inposition 1 automatically turn on or off de-pending on the darkness of the surround-ings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Headlights and turn signals(for the U.S.A.)


121


Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or “AUTO” position with thetail lights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened after the “POWER”switch is turned off.

Position 2 or “AUTO” position with theheadlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when any of the doors or trunklid is opened and closed after the“POWER” switch is turned off.

The lights can be turned off immediatelyby pushing the lock switch on the elec-tronic key with all the doors locked andthe trunk lid closed.

The time period before the lights turn offcan be changed. For details, ask yourToyota dealer.

If any of the doors or trunk lid is leftopen, the lights automatically turn off after20 minutes.

To turn on the lights again, set the“POWER” switch at ON or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the knob isin the “DRL OFF” position.

NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave thelights on for a long period when thehybrid system is turned off.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The “POWER” switch is set at ON withthe hybrid system turned on.

� The light switch is in the “AUTO” posi-tion with the headlights off or position1.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto the position 3 (“DRL OFF”) or turn the“POWER” switch off.

The daytime running light system can bedisabled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.


122


High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightseven when the headlights are off.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The “POWER” switch must be set at ON.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 373 in Section 7−3.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

The tail light indicator (green light) on theinstrument panel will tell you that the taillights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and all ofthe lights in the position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Headlights and turn signals(for Canada)


123


Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

When the tail lights/headlights are turnedon, the brightness of the instrument clus-ter will be reduced slightly unless the in-strument panel light control knob is turnedfully clockwise.

However, the brightness of the instrumentcluster will not be reduced in daytimeeven when the tail lights/headlights areturned on.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened after the “POWER”switch is turned off.

Position 2 or position 3 with the head-lights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when any of the doors or trunklid is opened and closed after the“POWER” switch is turned off.

The lights can be turned off immediatelyby pushing the lock switch on the elec-tronic key with all the doors locked andthe trunk lid closed.

The time period before the lights turn offcan be changed. For details, ask yourToyota dealer.

If any of the doors or trunk lid is leftopen, the lights automatically turn off after20 minutes.

To turn on the lights again, set the“POWER” switch at ON or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the knob isin the “OFF” position.


124


NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave thelights on for a long period when thehybrid system is turned off.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The “POWER” switch is set at ON withthe hybrid system turned on.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position,position 1 or position 3 with the head-lights off.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.


125


TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 373 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave theswitch on longer than necessary whenthe hybrid system is turned off.

Emergency flashers


126


To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

With the knob turned fully clockwise, theintensity of the instrument cluster lightswill not be reduced even when the taillights/headlights are turned on.

Without moon roof

With moon roof

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when the illu-minated entry system acts. For details,see “Illuminated entry system” on page127 in this Section.

Instrument panel light control Interior light


127


FRONT PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the front personal light,push the lens. To turn it off, push thelens once again.

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS (vehicles withmoon roof)

To turn on the rear personal light, pushthe switch. To turn it off, push theswitch once again.

By gently adjusting the shade of the rearpersonal light, you can change the direc-tion of the light to suit your preference.

When either of the rear side doors isopened, the light on that side turns onautomatically. Closing the rear side doorswill turn the lights off.

The interior light and the “POWER”switch light come on and remain on forabout 15 seconds when you carry theregistered key into the entry functionactuation area. For further informationof entry function actuation area, see“Smart key system” on page 32 in Sec-tion 1−2.

If all the doors are closed and the“POWER” switch is set at ACC or ON, thelights will fade out.

If all the doors are locked, the lights willfade out.

To prevent the 12 volt battery being dis-charged, all of the lights will automaticallyturn off when the “POWER” switch isturned off, and the door is left opened forabout 20 minutes.

When any of the doors are unlocked withwireless remote control function or me-chanical key, the lights will come on andremain on for about 15 seconds beforefading out.

When any of the doors are opened, thelights will come on and remain on forabout 15 seconds before fading out.

Personal lights Illuminated entry system


128


If all the doors are closed, when the“POWER” switch is turned off, the lightswill come on and remain on for about 15seconds.

This feature can be disabled and the dura-tion of the lighting can be changed. Fordetails, ask your Toyota dealer.

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Operation

Position 1 Intermittent operation

Position 2 Low speed operation

Position 3 High speed operation

Position 4 Single sweep operation

Position 5 Washer on

Rotating the band on the lever lets youadjust the wiper time interval when thewiper lever is in the intermittent position(position 1). Twist the band upward toincrease the time between sweeps, anddownward to decrease it.

To spray washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersprays.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 373 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Windshield wipers and washer


129


When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the sur-faces. An indicator light will illuminate toindicate the defogger is operating.

Heater panels in the outside rear viewmirrors will also quickly clear the sur-faces.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

The system will automatically shut offwhen the operation time has been com-pleted. The operation time is between 15minutes and 1 hour depending on the am-bient temperature and vehicle speed.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hotdo not touch them when the defoggerswitch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving thedefoggers on for a long time could causethe 12 volt battery to discharge, especiallyduring stop−and−go driving. The defoggersare not designed for drying rain water orfor melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers


130



131


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel economy meter 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi−information display 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6


132


The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the “POWER” switch is set at ON.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the “POWER” switchis set at ON. The engine operating tem-perature will vary with changes inweather and engine load.

1. Red zone

2. Blue zone

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


133


When the needle is in the blue zone, thecoolant temperature is cold. Heat may notbe available while the coolant temperatureis the blue zone.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 317 inSection 4.

The fuel economy meter indicates thecurrent fuel consumption in analogform when the engine is running. Whenonly the traction motor powers the ve-hicle, the needle indicates “E MODE”.

� The needle may indicate the best rateon the meter when the engine is run-ning but the fuel is not consumed.

� The needle may indicate the best rateon the meter when fuel consumption isless than the indicated value.

� The needle may indicate the worst rateon the meter when fuel consumption ismore than the indicated value.

Fuel economy meter


134


The following information is displayedon the multi−information display whenthe “POWER” switch is set at ON.

� Outside temperature and cruise in-formation

� Odometer and two trip meters

� Messages

During ordinary driving, the information isdisplayed. However, in case the vehiclehas a system malfunction or if there issome information that the driver should beinformed of, a message appears on thedisplay. See “—Messages” on page 140for details.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the cruise informationdisplay, the display will automatically beset to the initial mode.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

At extremely low temperatures, the mul-ti−information display may respond slow-ly.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Multi−information display—


135


Each time you push the “DISP” button,the display toggles through the follow-ing information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Cruising range

3. Average fuel consumption after refuel-ing

4. Driving distance

5. Average vehicle speed

6. Cruise information off

7. Zoom display of odometer and trip me-ter

8. Energy monitor

9. Eco drive level

The display will return to the outside tem-perature display with pushing and holdingthe “DISP” button for 1 second.

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

When the “POWER” switch is set at ON,the last previously used mode displayedjust before the “POWER” switch is turnedoff will appear.

—Outside temperature and cruise information


136


1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed temperature ranges from−40�C (−40�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor, “−−”or “E” will appear on the display. If “−−”or “E” appears on the display, contactyour Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−” appearsmomentarily when the “POWER” switch isquickly set to ON. It is normal if it goesout soon.

2. Driving range (“CRUISING RANGE”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates theapproximate distance that you can driveuntil the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It isdifferent from the actual distance traveled.

If the fuel gauge malfunctions, the mileagefigure will not appear.

When the vehicle is refueled, the drivingrange is recalculated.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger than indicated. If fuel consumptionis poor, the driving range will be shorterthan indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comeson, refuel the vehicle even if the displayindicates that the vehicle can be drivenfurther.

3. Average fuel consumption after re-fueling (“TANK AVG”)

Average fuel consumption after refuel-ing is calculated and displayed basedon total driving distance and total fuelconsumption.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the dis-played value is reset.

4. Driving distance (“SINCE START”)

The driving distance after the hybridsystem started is displayed.

Every time you turn on the hybrid system,the driving distance display is reset.

5. Average vehicle speed(“AVG SPEED”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated anddisplayed based on total driving dis-tance and total driving time.


137


6. Cruise information off

The display indicates only odometer andtwo trip meters.

7. Zoom display of odometer and tripmeter

The odometer and one of the trip metersare displayed simultaneously. See“—Odometer and two trip meters” de-scribed below.

8. Energy monitor

The operating condition of the hybridsystem appears on the display.

See “Energy monitor” on page 3 for de-tails.

9. Eco drive level

The eco drive level is visually displayedon the multi−information display, and itindicates the average fuel consumptionafter the hybrid system is turned on. Inaccordance with the average fuel con-sumption, the levels are displayed asfollows:

Level 0—25 MPG or less or9.0 L/100 km or more

Level 1—26 to 30 MPG or8.8 to 8.0 L/100 km

Level 2—31 to 35 MPG or7.8 to 7.0 L/100 km

Level 3—36 MPG or more or6.8 L/100 km or less

The brightness of the arcs around the fueleconomy meter and speedometer changeaccording to the eco drive level. The high-er the fuel economy, the brighter the lightbecomes.

Level 0—Does not illuminateLevel 1—Illuminates weaklyLevel 2—Illuminates brightlyLevel 3—Illuminates most brightly

This function works even if a display otherthan the eco drive level is shown on themulti−information display.


138


When the hybrid system is turned off, theeco drive level is displayed for a fewseconds to show the average fuel con-sumption for the most recent trip.

If the average fuel consumption is in level3, “EXCELLENT!” is simultaneously dis-played under the eco drive level.

Normal display

Zoom display

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

Selecting the zoom display of theodometer and trip meter when thecruise information is displayed causesthe odometer and one of the trip me-ters to be displayed simultaneously.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

—Odometer and two tripmeters


139


3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.


140


Message Status Action

a Parking brake is not released. Release parking brake.

b Engine oil pressure is low. Stop and check.

c Hybrid system malfunction is detected. Stop your vehicle and call a Toyota dealer.

d Coolant temperature is high. Stop your vehicle immediately.

e The temperature for the inverter, traction motor ormotor generator is high.

Stop your vehicle immediately.

—Messages


141



f Any of doors are opened. Close doors completely.

g Trunk is opened. Close trunk completely.

h Malfunction of VSC function is detected. Take vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

i Transmission is out of the “P” position when startingthe hybrid system.

Shift the transmission to the “P” position whenstarting the hybrid system.


142



j Hybrid battery is discharged or its voltage is low. Stop and check.

k Transmission selector lever is not set “P” position. Shift the transmission selector lever to “P” position.

l Brake pedal is not depressed when starting thehybrid system.

Depress brake pedal firmly.

m Transmission selector lever is not set “P” position. Shift the transmission selector lever to “P” position.

n

� “POWER” switch is not turned off when getting outvehicle carrying the electronic key.

� Electronic key is not detected in the vehicle when“POWER” switch is set at ON.

� Turn hybrid system off.

� Confirm that the key is in the vehicle.

o Electronic key battery is low. Replace key battery.

p Steering lock system malfunction is detected. Contact your Toyota dealer.


143



q Steering lock is stuck. Turn steering wheel slightly.

r Oil change is nearly due. Check engine oil.

s Oil change is due. Change engine oil.

t Washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid.

u Moon roof is opened with “POWER” switch turned off. Close moon roof.

v Fuel door is left open. Close the fuel door.


144


(a)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe parking brake is not completely re-leased at the vehicle speed of 5 km/h(3 mph) or more.

Stop the vehicle and release the park-ing brake fully.

The message appears with the masterwarning light and a warning tone sounds.

(b)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

Turn the engine off as soon as possibleand contact your Toyota dealer.


(c)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe hybrid system is malfunctioning.

If a malfunction of the hybrid system isdetected, the message appears with themaster warning light and warning tonewhen the “POWER” switch is on.

If the message appears, stop the ve-hicle as soon as possible and contacta Toyota dealer.

(d)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe engine coolant temperature is toohigh.

Stop the vehicle and allow the engineto cool. See “If your vehicle overheats”on page 317 in Section 4.


NOTICE

Do not continue driving with an over-heated engine.

(e)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe temperature for the inverter, trac-tion motor or motor generator is toohigh.

Stop the vehicle and allow the the in-verter, traction motor and motor gener-ator to cool. See “If your vehicle over-heats” on page 317 in Section 4.


NOTICE

Do not continue driving with the mes-sage displayed.


145


(f)

This message is to remind the driverthat any of the doors are opened.

Close the door securely.

The message appears with the masterwarning light and a warning tone soundswhen the vehicle speed rises above 5km/h (3 mph).

(g)

This message is to remind the driverthat the trunk is opened.

Close the trunk securely.

The message appears with the masterwarning light a warning tone sounds whenthe vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3mph).

(h)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe vehicle stability control (VSC) func-tion of the vehicle dynamics integratedmanagement (VDIM) is malfunctioning.

If the message appears, the functionsof VDIM listed below may not work pro-perly. Have the vehicle checked by aToyota dealer as soon as possible.However, as conventional braking oper-ates when applied, there is no problemto continue your driving.

� Traction control function

� Vehicle stability control function


If the message appears together with thered brake system warning light, stop thevehicle immediately. For details, see “Ser-vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-ers” on page 150.

(i)

This message is to remind the driverthat the transmission is not in the “P”position when starting the vehicle.

If the message appears, put the trans-mission in the “P” position and pushthe “POWER” switch again. For the hy-brid system starting procedure, see“How to start the hybrid system” onpage 301 in Section 3.



146


(j)

This message is to warn of the hybridbattery condition.

The message appears in the followingconditions.:

� The hybrid battery voltage drops be-cause the transmission is left in the“N” position.

If you put the transmission in the “P”position and the message disappears,the system is working properly.

� The hybrid battery is discharged.

If the hybrid battery is discharged andthe message appears along with the“READY” light turned on, stop your ve-hicle in a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.


(k)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe transmission is not in the “P” posi-tion when the driver’s door is opened.

Put the transmission in the “P” posi-tion.


(l)

This message is to remind the driverthat the brake pedal is not depressedwhen starting the hybrid system.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and pressthe “POWER” switch. For the starting pro-cedure, see “How to start the hybrid sys-tem” on page 301 in Section 3.

If the brake pedal is not depressed, themessage appears and a warning tonesounds when the hybrid system is started.

(m)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe transmission is not in the “P” posi-tion when leaving the vehicle.

Put the transmission in the “P” posi-tion.


(n)

When this message appears in the fol-lowing cases, a warning tone sounds.

� The key is not detected in the vehiclebecause someone has taken the keyoutside of the vehicle without turningthe hybrid system off. At this time, awarning tone sounds. The above mes-sage turns off if the “POWER” switchis turned off or the key is in the ve-hicle.

� The key is not detected in the vehiclewhen the “POWER” switch is pushed.In this case, the above message ap-pears for 8 seconds.


147


(o)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe electronic key battery is low.

Change the key battery as soon as pos-sible to ensure that the smart key sys-tem operates properly.


(p)

This message warns the driver that thesteering lock function malfunctions. Atthis time, the amber indicator light onthe “POWER” switch flashes.

The hybrid system will not be turned onin this case. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.


(q)

This message appears when the steer-ing lock is stuck. The message appearsfor 15 seconds. At this time, the greenindicator light on the “POWER” switchflashes.

To free the steering lock, rotate the steer-ing wheel slightly left or right while press-ing the “POWER” switch.


(r)

This message is to remind the driver tochange the engine oil. The message isa prior notice.

Toyota recommends that the engine oilbe changed as soon as possible.

If the driving range after the previous oilchange reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), themessage appears for about 15 secondswith the master warning light and a warn-ing tone sounds.

The engine oil maintenance data must bereset after the engine oil change. Seefollowing “Resetting the engine oil mainte-nance data”.


148


(s)

This message is to remind the driver tochange the engine oil.

Change the engine oil as soon as pos-sible.

If the driving range after the previous oilchange reaches 8000 km (5000 miles), themessage appears with the master warninglight and a warning tone sounds. Themessage stays on with the “POWER”switch set at ON.

The engine oil maintenance data must bereset after the engine oil change. See“Resetting the engine oil maintenancedata” below for the procedure to reset thesystem.

Resetting the engine oil maintenancedata

The engine oil maintenance data must bereset after replacement of the engine oil.Reset the data by the following procedure:

1. Turn off the hybrid system with the tripmeter A reading shown.

For details, see “—Odometer and two tripmeters” on page 138 in this Section.

2. The “POWER” switch must be set atON while holding down the trip meterreset knob. A message “OIL MILEAGERESET MODE” will appear on the dis-play.

3. Hold down the knob at least 5 sec-onds. A message “COMPLETE” will ap-pear and the message “OIL MILEAGERESET MODE” goes off.

(t)

This message appears when the washerfluid level becomes very low.

Fill the tank as soon as possible.

The message appears with the masterwarning light a warning tone sounds.

(u)

This message appears when the driver’sdoor is opened with the “POWER”switch turned off and the moon roofopened.

When you leave your vehicle, be sure toclose the moon roof.



149


(v)

This message is to remind the driverthat the fuel filler door is open.

The message appears in the followingcases.

1. When you start the vehicle with thefuel door left open after refueling.

2. When you leave the fuel door open formore than 30 minutes during refueling.

In case 1, stop the vehicle and closethe fuel lid. In case 2, the internal valvein the fuel tank is closed. You mustremove the fuel nozzle, tighten the fueltank cap and close the fuel door. Ifrefueling is not completed you muststart refueling from the beginning.

CAUTION

Do not continue to refuel in case 2.Fuel may spray out of the fuel open-ing if you refuel the vehicle.



150


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

or

(red indicator and buzzer)If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(yellow indicator)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stopimmediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers


151


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) orTake vehicle to Toyota dealer.If red brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota deal-er.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(i)(indicator and buzzer)

Close all doors and trunk lid.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light comes on after blinkingfor 1 minute, contact Toyota dealer.

(l) Read a message on multi−information display.

(m) Parking brake reminder buzzer Release parking brake.


152


(a) Brake System Warning Lights

These lights come on in the followingcases when the hybrid system is turnedon.

RED WARNING LIGHT

� When the parking brake is applied...

When the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h(3 mph), a message “PARK BRAKE” ap-pears on the multi−information display, themaster warning light flashes and a warn-ing tone sounds.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the regenerative brake systemor electronically controlled brakesystem fails...

When the yellow warning light comes on,the regenerative brake system and/or elec-tronically controlled brake system is mal-functioning. Take your vehicle to yourToyota dealer.

RED AND YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the hydraulic brake systemfails...

If the red and yellow warning lights comeon, it indicates a serious problem and youcan continue driving no longer.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The red warning light does not comeon even if the parking brake is appliedwhen the hybrid system is on.

� The lights do not come on when thehybrid system is turned on with theparking brake released.

A red or yellow warning light turning onbriefly during operation does not indicatea problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

� The red warning light does not turnoff even after the parking brake isreleased with the hybrid systemturned on.

� The red warning light stays on withthe hybrid system turned on.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properly andyour stopping distance will becomelonger. Depress the brake pedal firmlyand bring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The red brake system warning lightremains on together with the “ABS”warning light and “CHECK VSCSYSTEM” warning message.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system and vehicle stabilitycontrol system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.


153


In the following case, drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer.

� The yellow warning light comes onwhile driving.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-tion:

� The red and yellow warning lights maystay on for about 60 seconds after thehybrid system is started. It is normalif it turns off after a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red and yellow warn-ing lights. It is normal if the light turnsoff after a few seconds.

� The brake pedal stroke may be shortwhen the brake pedal is depressedwith the hybrid system off.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the “POWER” switch is set at ONor engine start, the reminder light flashesand buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat beltis not fastened. Unless the driver fastensthe belt, the light continues flashing andthe buzzer sounds for about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-tened, the buzzer will sound in a differenttone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stop thebuzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzerstill sounds, make sure the front passen-ger’s seat belt is fastened.

The vehicle speed linked seat belt remind-er buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

However, Toyota recommends that theseat belt reminder buzzer be operationalto alert the driver and front passenger thatthe seat belts are not fastened.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the “POWER” switch is set at ON,the reminder light flashes if a passengersits in the front passenger seat and doesnot fasten the seat belt. Unless the frontpassenger fastens the belt, the light con-tinue flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-tened, the buzzer will sound in a differenttone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stop thebuzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzerstill sounds, make sure the driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light to flash andbuzzer to sound.

The vehicle speed linked seat belt remind-er buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.


154


However, Toyota recommends that theseat belt reminder buzzer be operationalto alert the driver and front passenger thatthe seat belts are not fastened.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the hybrid system is running,the warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the hybrid sys-tem is running, malfunctions mayhave occurred. If the warning lightcomes on, immediately stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON and goesoff when the “READY” light comes on.This means that the warning lightsystem is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the hy-brid system, emission control system,electronic throttle control system, trans-mission electrical system or warning lightsystem itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 345in Section 6.

(f) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.


155


(g) “ABS” Warning Light

This light comes on when the “POWER”switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brakesystem function of the VDIM (vehicle dy-namics integrated management) is workingproperly, the light goes off when the“READY” light comes on. Thereafter, if thefunction malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on andthe yellow brake system warning light ison, the anti−lock brake system functionand the brake assist function of the VDIMmay not operate so that the wheel couldlock up during a sudden braking or brak-ing on slippery road surfaces However,the brake system still operates conven-tionally.

If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON.

� The light remains on when the“READY” light is on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

If the light comes on together with the redbrake system warning light, stop the ve-hicle immediately. For details, see “(a)Brake system warning light”.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but does not indicate the mal-function:

� The light may stay on for about 60seconds after the hybrid system isstarted. It is normal if the light goes offafter a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal ifthe light goes off after a few seconds.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the red brake systemwarning light, stop your vehicle im-mediately in a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system function and brake as-sist function will fail but also the ve-hicle will become extremely unstableduring braking.


156


(h) Electric Power Steering SystemWarning Light

This light comes on when the powersteering control system fails.

CAUTION

If this light comes on, take your ve-hicle to the Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, you may feelthe heavy steering wheel maneuver-ing. Drive your vehicle while grippingthe steering wheel firmly.

(i) Open Door Warning Light and Buzz-er

This light remains on until all the doorsand trunk lid are completely closed.

The buzzer also sounds once when anyof the doors or trunk lid is not completelyclosed at the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3mph) or more. Stop the vehicle and closethe door and trunk lid completely.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON. It goesoff after about 6 seconds. This meansthe SRS front airbags and seat belt pre-tensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources.

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible to.

� The light does not come on when the“POWER” switch is set at ON or re-mains on for more than 6 seconds.



(k) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure ofone or more of your tires (including thespare tire) is low. The light comes onwhen the “POWER” switch is set at ON.It goes off when the “READY” light comeson. This indicates that the tire pressurewarning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop yourvehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-sible and check that the inflation pressureof all tires (including the spare tire) is asspecified on the tire and loading informa-tion label. (See “Checking tire inflationpressure” on page 359 in Section 7−2.)The light should go off a few minutes afterthe tire pressure is adjusted.

If the warning light blinks (comes on afterblinking for 1 minute), the tire pressurewarning system may be malfunctioning.Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 168 in Section 1−7.


157


(l) Master Warning Light

If the master warning light comes on, amessage appears on the multi−informationdisplay. Depending on the conditions awarning tone may sound.

(m) Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer

The buzzer acts once when the parkingbrake is not completely released at thevehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.Stop the vehicle and release the parkingbrake fully.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. With your foot off the brake pedal,press the “POWER” switch and set itat ON.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The electric power steeringwarning light goes off after a few sec-onds. The SRS warning light goes offafter about 6 seconds.

5. With depressing the brake pedal, pressthe “POWER” switch.

All of the service reminder indicators ex-cept the red brake system warning lightand driver’s seat belt reminder light go offwhen the “READY” light comes on.

The driver’s seat belt reminder light goesoff when the driver’s seat belt is fastened.The red brake system warning light goesoff when the parking brake is released.

There may be the case that the red andyellow brake system warning lights and“ABS” warning light stay on for about 60seconds. It is normal if they go out aftera while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.


158



159


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSPOWER switch, Transmission and Parking brake“POWER” switch 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle dynamics integrated management 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7


160


When the key is in the vehicle, press-ing the “POWER” switch (hybrid systemstart−up switch) allows you to start andstop the hybrid system or choose atthe ACC, ON, or “POWER” switch off.

When the brake pedal is not depressed,pressing the “POWER” switch changes themode as follows. Press the switch slowlyand firmly.

First time—ACC (accessory) mode (illu-minates amber)Accessories such as the radio operate.

Second time—ON mode (illuminates am-ber)All accessories on.

Third time—Power off (indicator lightoff)

Pressing the “POWER” switch again re-turns the mode switch to ACC.

If a buzzer sounds and the master warn-ing light comes on for 5 seconds whenpressing the “POWER” switch, this indi-cates that the key is not in the vehicle.The message “KEY IS NOT DETECTED”will also appear on the multi−informationdisplay.

If the brake pedal is depressed, the in-dicator light will turn green, regardlessof which mode is selected. When theindicator light is green, pressing the“POWER” switch once turns the hybridsystem on. (For starting tips, see “Howto start the hybrid system” on page 301in Section 3.)

“POWER” switch


161


When the “POWER” switch is changedfrom ON (with the hybrid system turnedoff) to off and then changed to ACC,“DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL” willappear on the multi−information display.

If the amber indicator light on the“POWER” switch blinks, this indicates amalfunction of the push start system. Turnoff the hybrid system immediately andcontact your Toyota dealer.

Approximately five hours after the hybridsystem is turned off, you may hear soundcoming from underneath the trunk for sev-eral minutes. This is normal operation anddoes not indicate a malfunction. (See“Leak detection pump” on page ix.)

It is not a malfunction if the needle on allmeters and gauges move slightly when the“POWER” switch is set at ACC, ON orwhen the hybrid system is turned on.

NOTICE

Do not leave the “POWER” switch atACC or ON with the hybrid systemturned off. The 12 volt battery willdischarge.

When the 12 volt battery is discon-nected or run down, the push buttonstart function memorizes the currentmode. After you reconnect, replace, or re-charge the battery, the memorized modeis selected automatically. In any of thesecases, turn off the hybrid system if thehybrid system is turned on.


162


Your transmission has a shift lock systemto minimize the possibility of incorrectoperation. This means you can only shiftout of “P” position when the brake pedalis depressed (with the “POWER” switchset at ON).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, hybrid system starting

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

B: Engine braking

Transmission

Shift with the brake pedaldepressed. (The “POWER” switch must beset at ON.)

Shift normally.

Selector lever


163


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the hybrid system as instructed in“How to start the hybrid system” onpage 301 in Section 3. The transmis-sion must be in “P”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the hybridsystem on. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking intentionally, shiftthe selector lever to the “B” position andtake your foot off the accelerator pedal.

During high speed driving you may feelthat engine braking is less effective thanthat of conventional vehicle.

Do not continue normal driving with thetransmission in “B” for a long time.This may cause decreased fuel econo-my.

CAUTION

Be careful when using engine brakingon a slippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(d) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(e) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

When turning the hybrid system off, putthe transmission in the “P” position.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.


164


(f) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift transmission selector le-ver” on page 329 in Section 4.

Vehicle dynamics integrated manage-ment (VDIM) is designed to control ve-hicle motion continuously using all pos-sible functions to stabilize the motion.

It is important to keep the tires in goodcondition for the system to properlycontrol vehicle motion. Refer to the in-formation for tires on pages 359through 367 in Section 7−2.

The system has the functions listed below.Each function becomes operational whenthe vehicle speed exceeds the speeds asshown below.

� Brake assist function7 km/h (4 mph)

� Anti−lock brake system function7 km/h (4 mph)

� Traction control function0 km/h (0 mph)

� Vehicle stability control function15 km/h (9 mph)

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on theVDIM. Even if the system is operat-ing, you must always drive carefullyand attentively. Reckless driving willresult in an unexpected accident. Ifthe slip indicator flashes, specialcare should be taken.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use any tires otherthan specified, or different types orsizes, the VDIM may not functioncorrectly. When replacing the tiresor wheels, contact your Toyota deal-er.

� Do not modify the suspensions. Ifyou modify the suspensions, theVDIM may not function correctly.

� In situations where the road surfaceis covered with ice or snow, snowtires or tire chains should be used.

Vehicle dynamics integratedmanagement


165


Slip indicator light

When the “POWER” switch is set at ONis turned on, the slip indicator light comeson. It will go off when the “READY” lightcomes on. If the slip indicator light doesnot come on when the “POWER” switch isset at ON, contact your Toyota dealer.

While the VDIM is using its various func-tions to stabilize vehicle motion, the slipindicator in the instrument cluster flashesand the buzzer sounds. Drive carefullywhen you are in situations where the indi-cator flashes. You may feel some vibra-tions from the underbody and you mayfeel some resistance when turning thesteering wheel when the VDIM is using itsvarious functions.

“ABS” warning light (U.S.A.)

“ABS” warning light (Canada)


166


“ABS” warning light

When the “POWER” switch is set atON, the “ABS” warning light comes on.It will go off when the “READY” lightcomes on. If the “ABS” warning lightdoes not come on when the “POWER”switch is set at ON, contact yourToyota dealer.

If the “ABS” warning light remains onafter the “POWER” switch is set at ONor if it comes on while driving, theanti−lock brake system function maynot operate properly. Although thebrake system operates without the func-tion, drive carefully and have your ve-hicle checked by a Toyota dealer assoon as possible. For details, see “Ser-vice reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 150 in Section 1−6.

Message “CHECK VSC SYSTEM”

If “CHECK VSC SYSTEM” appears onthe multi−information display, the trac-tion control and vehicle stability controlfunctions may not operate properly. Al-though the brake system operates nor-mally without these functions, drivecarefully and have your vehicle checkedby a Toyota dealer as soon as possible.For details, see “—Messages” on page140 in Section 1−6.

BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION

The brake assist function is designed toassist with emergency braking. When thedriver suddenly depresses the brake ped-al, the device treats it as emergency brak-ing and adds braking force.

If you slam the brakes on or apply thebrakes more firmly, more powerful brakingwill be applied.

CAUTION

The brake assist function is not de-signed to shorten braking distance.Always drive at a moderate speed andmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Depending onroad conditions, braking distance maybe longer than that of a vehicle with-out the brake assist device. If tirechains are used, braking distancemay become longer.


167


ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM FUNCTION

The anti−lock brake system function is de-signed to help prevent lock−up of thewheels during sudden braking or whenbraking on slippery road conditions. Thisassists in providing directional stabilityand steering performance of the vehicleunder these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the brake pedal is de-pressed and the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, the slip indicatorflashes. In this situation, to let the anti−lock brake system work for you, justhold the brake pedal down more firmly.Do not pump the brake in a panic stop.This will result in reduced braking per-formance.

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem function.

When the anti−lock brake system functionis activated, you may hear the anti−lockbrake system function operating soundand the vibrations of the vehicle body andsteering wheel. You may also hear themotor sound in the engine compartmenteven after the vehicle is stopped. Howev-er, it does not indicate any trouble.

CAUTION

The anti−lock brake system functionis not designed to shorten brakingdistance. Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you. De-pending on road conditions, brakingdistance may be longer than that ofa vehicle without the anti−lock brakesystem. If tire chains are used, brak-ing distance may become longer.

Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake device, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.


168


TRACTION CONTROL FUNCTION

The traction control function is designed tohelp prevent skid of the drive wheels dur-ing sudden acceleration on slippery roadsurfaces.

You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against drive wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at a moderate speed.

VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROLFUNCTION

The vehicle stability control function is de-signed to help prevent skid of the wheelswhile cornering on slippery road surfacesor when turning the steering wheel abrupt-ly.

The system controls the driving and brak-ing forces on each tire and also controlsthe power steering assistance to help thedriver to recover vehicle stability.

CAUTION

Depending on the road conditions,the vehicle stability control functionmay not be able to stabilize your ve-hicle. Always drive at a moderatespeed.

The tire pressure warning system warnsyou that the tire inflation pressure islow.

The tire pressure warning system is nota substitute for checking normal tire infla-tion pressure. Check the tire inflationpressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activateimmediately if bursts or sudden airleakage should occur.

Tire pressure warning system


169


The tire pressure warning light comes onwhen the “POWER” switch is set at ONand goes off after a few seconds. Thismeans the tire pressure warning light isoperating properly. If the tire inflation pres-sure becomes low, the light comes onagain. In this case, adjusting the tire infla-tion pressure will turn off the light after afew minutes. If the light comes on afterblinking for 1 minute, the tire pressurewarning system is not working properly.

Indicatorstatus

Meanings Do this

ONTire inflationpressure islow

Adjust thetire inflationpressure

ON afterblinking for1 minute

Tire pres-sure warn-ing systemmalfunction

Have thesystemchecked atyour Toyotadealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, be sure to observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to doso could cause loss of vehicle controland result in death or serious injury.

� Stop your vehicle in a safe place assoon as possible. Adjust the tireinflation pressure immediately.

� If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, it is probablethat you have a flat tire. Check thetires. If the tire is flat, change tothe spare tire and have the flat tirerepaired by the nearest Toyota deal-er.

� Avoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of the steer-ing wheel or the brakes.


170


The tire pressure warning light may turnon due to natural causes such as naturalair leaks or tire inflation pressure changescaused by temperature. In this case, ad-justing the tire inflation pressure will turnoff the light after a few minutes.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch does not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. Adjusting the tire inflationpressure will turn off the light.

The compact spare tire is not equippedwith the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warninglight will not turn off even though the flattire is replaced with the spare tire. Re-place the spare tire with the repaired tireand adjust the proper tire inflation pressur-e. The tire pressure warning light will turnoff after a few minutes.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label (tireand load information label). (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label(tire and load information label), youshould determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that il-luminates a low tire pressure telltale(tire pressure warning light) when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure telltale (tire pres-sure warning light) illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under−inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under−inflation also re-duces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.


171


Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-sure warning system) is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder−inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale (tirepressure warning light).

NOTICE

� Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as tire pressure warning valveand transmitter will be damaged.

� When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror authorized tire dealer. The tirepressure warning valves and trans-mitters will be affected by theinstallation or removal of tires.

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGLIGHT BLINKS (comes on after blinkingfor 1 minute )...

If the tire pressure warning light blinks(comes on after blinking for 1 minute)when the “POWER” switch is set at ON,the tire pressure warning system is notworking properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-ing conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, thesystem will work properly.)

� If tires not equipped with tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters areused.


172


� If the ID code on the tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters is notregistered on the tire pressure warningECU.

� If electronic devices or facilities usingsimilar radio wave frequencies arenearby.

� If a radio set at similar frequencies isin use in the vehicle.

� If a window tint that affects the radiowave signals is installed.

� If there is a lot of snow or ice on thevehicle, in particular around the wheelsor wheel housings.

� If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

� If tire chains are used.

� If the tire inflation pressure is morethan 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73psi).

If the tire pressure warning light comes onafter blinking for 1 minute frequently whenthe “POWER” switch is set at ON, haveit checked by your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tirepressure warning system may not workproperly with some types of tires.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.


173



−Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

−Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

−Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

−Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.



Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may notcause interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, besure to install tire pressure warning valvesand transmitters. ID codes on the tirepressure warning valves and transmittersare registered on the tire pressure warningECU. When replacing a tire pressurewarning valve and transmitter, it is neces-sary to register the ID code of tire pres-sure warning valve and transmitter. Havethe ID code registered by your Toyotadealer.

If the ID code is not registered the sys-tem will not work properly, After about 1hour, the tire pressure warning light comeon after blinking for 1 minute to indicatea system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters must bereplaced, have them replaced by yourToyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters will beaffected by the installation or removalof tires.


174


TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RESETSWITCH

When initializing the system, the presenttire inflation pressure is stored as stan-dard. The tire pressure warning systemdetermines decreased air pressure bycomparing the present and the standardtire inflation pressures. When you changethe set tire inflation pressure, it is neces-sary to initialize the tire pressure warningsystem.

� When rotating the tires on vehicles dif-fering with front and rear tire inflationpressures.

� When changing the tire size.

To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place andturn the “POWER” switch off.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. (See “Tires” on page385 in Section 8.)

3. Press the “POWER” switch and set itat ON.

4. Open the glove box, and push and holdthe tire pressure warning reset switchuntil the tire pressure warning lightblinks slowly three times.

5. Leave the system for a few minuteswith the “POWER” switch set at ONand then turn the “POWER” switch off.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchwhile vehicle is moving, initialization is notperformed.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchaccidentally and initialization is performed,adjust the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level and initialize the systemagain.

If the tire pressure warning light does notblink slowly three times when you pushand hold the reset switch, initialization hasfailed and the tire pressure warning sys-tem may not work properly. In this case,initialize the system again. If initializationcannot be performed, have the systemchecked at your Toyota dealer.


175


CAUTION

Do not push the reset switch withoutadjusting the tire inflation pressure tothe specified level. Otherwise, the tirepressure warning light may not comeon even if the tire inflation pressureis low, or it may come on when thetire inflation pressure is actually nor-mal.

Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

A warning message “PARK BRAKE” ap-pears on the multi−information display anda warning tone sounds to remind you torelease the parking brake when the ve-hicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3 mph)with the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Parking brake


176


The cruise control is designed to main-tain a set cruising speed without requir-ing the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruising speed can be set to anyspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the vehicle capabili-ties, cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades. However, changes in ve-hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the“ON−OFF” button. The cruise control indi-cator light on the instrument panel willcome on to indicate that the cruise controlis operational. Pressing the “ON−OFF”button again turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed must be reset when the cruise con-trol is turned on again.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, turn the system offwhen it is not in use. Make sure thecruise control indicator light is off.

Cruise control


177


SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarilycancelled by the driver or by the systemitself under certain circumstances. Tempo-rary cancellation allows the set cruisingspeed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-celled by doing the following:

� Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it

� Depressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruisecontrol is temporarily cancelled:

� When vehicle speed falls below 40km/h (25 mph)

� When vehicle stability control is acti-vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-trol is cancelled and the set speed iserased from memory.

The cruise control indicator light remainson to indicate that the system is still inoperation.

To turn the cruise control off, press the“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the cruisecontrol indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-celled, the cruising speed can be resumedby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.


178


RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the cruise control indicator light flasheswhen using the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


179



180


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio and hands−free phone systemsReference 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hands−free phone system 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8


181


Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc playerwith changer (with XM satellite radio∗ con-troller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tunerand service. Contact your Toyota deal-er for details.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionswitch is set at ACC or ON.

CAUTION

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. andCanada:

� Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:Any unauthorized changes or modifi-cations to this equipment will voidthe user’s authority to operate thisdevice.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics


182


� Laser products

� Do not take this unit apart or at-tempt to make any changes your-self. This is an intricate unit thatuses a laser pickup to retrieve in-formation from the surface ofcompact discs. The laser is care-fully shielded so that its rays re-main inside the cabinet. There-fore, never try to disassemble theplayer or alter any of its partssince you may be exposed to la-ser rays and dangerous voltages.

� This product utilizes a laser. Useof controls or adjustments or per-formance of procedures otherthan those specified herein mayresult in hazardous radiation ex-posure.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audiosystem on and off.

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or“DISC·AUX” to turn on that function with-out pushing “POWER·VOLUME”.

You can turn on the compact disc playerby inserting a compact disc.

You can turn off the compact disc playerby ejecting the compact disc. If the audiosystem was previously off, then the entireaudio system will be turned off when youeject the compact disc. If the radio waspreviously on, it will come on again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal-er for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or“DISC·AUX” if the system is already onbut you want to switch from one functionto other.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITERADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-lents) must be purchased and installed. Asubscription to the XM satellite radio ser-vice is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM satelliteradio

An XM satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.


183


How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM radio, visit XM on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM’s ListenerCare at (800) 967−2346. The XM radio issolely responsible for the quality, availabil-ity and content of the satellite radio ser-vices provided, which are subject to theterms and conditions of the XM radio cus-tomer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-low.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM Satel-lite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM satel-lite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM service or when reporting aproblem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-phanumeric characters appears. If you se-lect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel (000) alter-nates the display between the radio IDand the specific radio ID code.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

SRS � (type 1 only)

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS�and SRS TruBass� audio enhancementtechnologies, under license from SRSLabs, Inc., in all mode except AM radiomode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol aretrademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.FOCUS and TruBass technologies areincorporated under license from SRSLabs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange (type 2 only), andbass levels. In fact, different kinds of mu-sic and vocal programs usually sound bet-ter with different mixes of treble, midrangeand bass.

You can adjust sound characteristics. Dif-ferent sound characteristics can be re-corded for each audio source.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.


184


Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of other.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed onthe inside of the rear window.

NOTICE

Putting a film (especially a conductiveor metallic film) on the rear windowwill noticeably reduce the sensitivityof the radio.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The compact discplayer will play from track 1 through tothe end of the disc. Then it will play fromtrack 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player does not needan adaptor to play compact disc singles.Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3in.) in diameter−smaller than standarddiscs.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compactdisc singles—it could cause trackingerrors or interfere with the ejection ofcompact discs.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. This compact disc play-er can store up to six discs. The playerwill play from track 1 through to the endof the disc. Then it will play from track1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc player. Insert onlyone compact disc into slot at atime.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.


185


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1


186


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the player will resumeplaying.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CTRL (Tone and sound balancecontrols)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CTRL”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed AutomaticSound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer canbe turned on by turning the knob. In addi-tion, turning the knob allows you to selectfrom LOW, MID, and HIGH volume andtone settings. The ASL system automati-cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-dance with the driving speed.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set to compactdisc operation, the display shows thetrack number currently being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (externaldevice) modes, press the “DISC·AUX”button. The AUX mode is only availablewhen AUX adapter is connected to thesystem. When the AUX adapter is in use,“AUX” will appear on the display.


187


Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofthe separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of the separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push “�” or “�” side of the “FOLDER”several times until the number of the fold-er you want to listen to appears on thedisplay.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:Push and hold the “�” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.

POWER·VOLUME (Power and Volume)

Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audiosystem on and off. Turn“POWER·VOLUME” to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.


188


MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.


189


SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack on the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.


190


SEEK·TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the “�” side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

Use this button to file up or down to adifferent file.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” several times until the fileyou want to listen to appears on the dis-play. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current file, push the “�” sideof the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.


191


TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the frequency. Turn the knobcounterclockwise to step down the fre-quency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tofile up. Turn the knob counterclockwise tofile down.


192


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2


193


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM·SAT”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XM satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune inthe desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe channel to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-ton for the channel you want. The presetbutton number and channel number willappear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channelsfor each button. (The display will show“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push“AM·SAT” button.)∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the player will resumeplaying.

AM·SAT (AM band and XM satellite ra-dio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the AM or XM band.“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,your audio system will display followingerror messages.

“ANTENNA”:

� The XM antenna is not connected.Check whether the XM antenna cableis attached securely.

� A short−circuit occurs in the antenna orthe surrounding antenna cable. See aToyota certified dealer.


194


“UPDATING”:

� You have not subscribed to the XMsatellite radio. The radio is being up-dated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM satellite radio for sub-scription information. When a contact iscanceled, you can choose the “CH000”and all free−to−air channels.

� The premium channel you selected isnot authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it doesnot change automatically, select anoth-er channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM satel-lite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is tooweak at the current location. Wait untilyour vehicle reaches a location with astronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audioor program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected isnot broadcasting any programming. Selectanother channel.

“− − −”: The channel you selected is nolonger available. Wait for about 2 secondsuntil the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not changeautomatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is alsoavailable on the phone, please call (800)967−2346 during the following hours:Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


AUDIO CTRL (Tone and sound balancecontrols)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CTRL”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed AutomaticSound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The ASL system automatically ad-justs volume and tone in accordance withthe driving speed.

The ASL system can be turned on or off.Pushing and holding the “TUNE·FILE”knob shows the current status of the ASLsystem on the display. Turn the“TUNE·FILE” knob to turn on or off thesystem.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play acompact disc.

When the audio system is set to compactdisc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

To switch between CD and AUX (externaldevice) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-ton. The AUX mode is only available whenAUX adapter is connected to the system.When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”will appear on the display.


195


Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMAdata has been inserted. Remove the discfrom the player and insert an MP3/WMAdata disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn onthe radio and select the FM band. “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display. Thissystem allows you to set twelve FM sta-tions, two for each of the preset button.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button. When theindicators on both sides of the slot turngreen, insert a compact disc. After thedisc is loaded, the shutter of the slot willclose.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on). When theindicators on both sides of the slot turngreen, insert the first compact disc. Afterthe disc is loaded, the shutter of the slotwill close. After a few seconds, the shut-ter will automatically open again and theindicators will turn green so the next disccan be inserted. The same process canbe applied for loading the rest of thediscs. If the player is full of discs, “DISCFULL” will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

POWER·VOLUME (Power and Volume)

Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audiosystem on and off. Turn“POWER·VOLUME” to adjust the volume.


196


RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—you can either listen to all of the files onthe compact discs in random order. Youcan also listen to the files in a singlefolder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To randomly play all of the files on thecompact disc:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” willappear on the display and the player willplay all of the files on the disc in randomorder. To turn off the random playbackfeature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.


197


MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you canrepeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the file is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe file ends, it will repeat automatically.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

Repeating a folder:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall of the files in the folder. When the lastfile in the folder ends, the folder will re-peat from the beginning. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.


You can either scan the currently selectedchannel category or scan only the presetchannels for that band.

To scan the preset channels:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on thedisplay. The radio will tune in the nextpreset channel up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset channel. To stop scanning, pushthis button again.

To scan the currently selected channelcategory:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next channel in thesame channel category up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan again.To stop scanning, push this button again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner



198


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack on the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-ic disc or scan the first file of all thefolder.

Scanning the files on a folder:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the files in the folder you arelistening to. To select a file, push the“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on thedisc have been scanned in one pass, nor-mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first file of thenext folder. To select a folder, push the“SCAN” again. After all the folders havebeen scanned in one pass, normal playresumes.

SEEK·TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again tofind the station after that.


To select the next channel within the cur-rent channel category, push the “�” or“�” side of the “SEEK·TRACK” button.Repeat until a desired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner



199


Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number ofthe track you want to listen to appears onthe display. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, quicklypush the “�” side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

Use this button to file up or down to adifferent file.

Push “�” or “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” several times until the fileyou want to listen to appears on the dis-play. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current file, push the “�” sideof the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

XM satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, thedisplay changes as follows: CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAMTITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If there is no song/program title or artistname/feature associated with the channelat that time, “− − − − −” will appear on thedisplay.

This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radioand “Text Information”∗2 linked to the re-spective audio services.∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


∗2: Text Information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.


200


MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the displayfor the MP3/WMA file that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while theMP3/WMA file is playing. The displaychanges in the order from the elapsedtime to folder name to file name to albumtitle to track title to artist name, then backto the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while anMP3/WMA file that does not contain textdata is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear onthe display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,push and hold it until you hear a beep.The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the frequency. Turn the knobcounterclockwise to step down the fre-quency.


Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tostep up the channel. Turn the knob coun-terclockwise to step down the channel.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


MP3/WMA player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise tofile up. Turn the knob counterclockwise tofile down.

TYPE·FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

Radio


When you push the “�” or “�” side ofthe “TYPE·FOLDER” button while receivinga XM channel, the current channel catego-ry appears on the display.

When the channel category appears, pusheither “�” or “�” side of the“TYPE·FOLDER” button to switch to thenext or previous category.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


MP3/WMA player

To skip up or down to a different folder:Push “�” or “�” side of the “TYPE·FOLD-ER” several times until the number of thefolder you want to listen to appears onthe display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:Push and hold the “�” side of the buttonuntil you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audiodata (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audiodata (CD−DA) is played.


201


Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch


Push the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pushed.

Push the “−” side to decrease the volume.The volume continues to decrease whilethe switch is being pushed.

2. “� �” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release the switch, theradio will begin seeking up or down for astation. Do this again to find the nextstation.


To select a preset channel, push the “�”or “�” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.

Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

Audio remote controls(steering switches)


202


MP3/WMA player

To select a desired file:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the file you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current file, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired folder:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Repeat thisuntil the folder you want to listen to isset.

To select a desired disc:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Repeat thisuntil the disc you want to listen to is set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-dio mode. Each push changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is readyto use.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

An AUX adapter is installed inside theauxiliary box.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUXadapter, you can listen to music from aportable audio device through the vehicle’sspeaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to theAUX mode (external device mode) bypressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When theAUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appearon the display. To adjust the volume, turnthe “POWER·VOLUME” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portable au-dio device.

If you install an audio system other thana genuine audio system, you will not beable to use the AUX adapter.

Connected cables can be passed throughthe hold to the front passenger side of theauxiliary box. For details, see “Auxiliaryboxes” on page 268 in Section 1−10.

AUX adapter


203


NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acompact disc into the slot.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

XM∗

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner


Audio system operating hints


204


NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-its are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio commu-nications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occurin a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Your compact disc player is intendedfor use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.


205


� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs


206


NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player, or it may beimpossible to eject the disc.

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.


207


MP3/WMA FILES

� MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.

� The MP3/WMA player can play MP3and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R andCD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level2 and with the Romeo and Joliet filesystem.

� When naming an MP3 or WMA file,add the appropriate file extension (.mp3or .wma).

� The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions asMP3 or WMA files. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropri-ate file extensions.

� Multi−session compatible CDs can alsobe played.

� MP3 files are compatible with the ID3Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, andVer. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis-play disc title, track title and artistname in other formats.

� WMA files can contain a WMA tag thatis used in the same way as an ID3tag. WMA tags carry information suchas track title, artist name.

� The emphasis function is available onlywhen playing MP3/WMA files recordedat 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The systemcan play MP3 files with sampling fre-quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.However, the emphasis function is notavailable for files recorded at these fre-quencies.)

� The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally improves with higher bitrates. In order to achieve a reasonablelevel of sound quality, discs recordedwith a bit rate of at least 128 kbps arerecommended.

Playable bit ratesMP3 files:MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbpsWMA files:Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

� The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs record-er using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “pre−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

� M3u playlists are not compatible withthe audio player.

� MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PROformats are not compatible with the au-dio player.

� The MP3 player is compatible withVBR (Variable Bit Rate).

� When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast forward or reverse operations areused.

� It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

� MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-els deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levelsof folders. For this reason, we recom-mend creating discs with no more thantwo levels of folders.

� It is possible to play up to 192 foldersor 255 files on one disc.


208


001.mp3002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3

Folder 2004.wma005.mp3

Folder 3006.mp3

� The play order of the compact discwith the structure shown on the left isas follows:

CD−R and CD−RW discs

� CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (aprocess that allows discs to be playedon a conventional CD player) cannotbe played.

� It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a musicCD recorder or a personal computerbecause of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of theunit.

� It may not be possible to play discsrecorded on a personal computer de-pending on the application settings andthe environment. Record with the cor-rect format. (For details, contact theappropriate application manufacturers ofthe applications.)

� CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damagedby direct exposure to sunlight, hightemperatures or other storage condi-tions. The unit may be unable to playsome damaged discs.

� If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, playback will beginmore slowly than with a conventionalCD or CD−R disc.

� Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played using the DDCD (DoubleDensity CD) system.


209


TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on−demand toCD−R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in an MP3 file. This em-bedded information can include the tracktitle, the artist’s name, the album title, themusic genre, the year of production, com-ments and other data. The contents canbe freely edited using software with ID3tag editing functions. Although the tagsare restricted to the number of characters,the information can be viewed when thetrack is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag.WMA tags carry information such as tracktitle, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for theformatting of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are twolevels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-ter file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composedof one−byte capital letters and numbers.The “_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-ters (including the separation mark “.” andfile extension). Each folder must containfewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” softwarehave a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on convention-al discs.

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. Thedecoding formats for WMA files are Ver.7, 8, and 9.


210


Phone Setup (see page 216)

� Pair phone

To use the hands−free system, youneed to register your phone in the sys-tem.

� Change name

The registered phone names can bechanged.

� Delete

The registered phones can be deleted.

� List phones

The registered phone names can bechecked.

� Select phone

The registered phones can be selected.

� Set passkey

The passkey can be changed.

Security (see page 221)

� Set PIN

The PIN can be set or changed.

� Phone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

� Phone book unlock

The locked phone book can be un-locked.

System Setup (see page 225)

� Adjust Guidance Volume

Guidance volume can be adjusted.

� Initialize

Phone Book (see page 225)

� Add Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can beregistered.

� Change Name

The registered names can be changed.

� Delete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

� Delete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be de-leted.

� List names

The registered names can be checked.

� Set Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set

Redial (see page 233)

Callback (see page 234)

Making a phone call (see page 235)

Receiving a phone call (see page 238)

Talking on the phone (see page 239)

Hands−free phone system——Reference


211


This system supports Bluetooth�, awireless system that allows you tomake or receive calls without takingyour hands from the steering wheel andwithout using cables to connect thephone and system.

The phone must be paired to the systembefore using the hands−free feature. Ifyour cellular phone does not support Blue-tooth�, this system will not function.

CAUTION

While you are driving, do not use acellular phone or connect theBluetooth� phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone inthe car. The temperature indoor maybe high and damage the phone.

The system may not function in the follow-ing conditions and places:

� The cellular phone is turned off.

� The current position is outside thecommunication area.

� The cellular phone is not connected.

� The cellular phone has a low battery.

� The cellular phone is hiding behind theseat or in the glove box and consolebox.

� The cellular phone touches or is cov-ered with metal materials.

This system supports the following ser-vice.

� HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

� OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth�phone, and take OPP service individually.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned byBluetooth SIG. Inc.

—Some basics


212


When transferring ownership of the ve-hicle:

A lot of personal data is registeredwhen you use the hands−free system.When transferring ownership of the ve-hicle, initialize the system.

If you initialize it, the former state willnever come back again. Pay much atten-tion when initializing the data.

You can initialize the following data in thesystem.

� Phone book data

� Dialed numbers and received calls

� Speed dial

� Bluetooth� phone data

� Security code

FCC InformationCaution: Any changes or modifica-tions in construction of this devicewhich are not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

FCC Label InformationThis device complies with part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, In-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.

NOTE: This equipment has beentested and found to comply with thelimits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmfulinterference in a residential installa-tion. This equipment generates, usesand can radiate radio frequency ener-gy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, maycause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is noguarantee that interference will not oc-cur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful inter-ference to radio or television recep-tion, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the useris encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of thefollowing measures:−Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.−Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.−Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.−Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.


213


CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels ofRF energy that it deemed to complywithout maximum permissive exposureevaluation (MPE). But it is desirablethat it should be installed and oper-ated with at least 20 cm and morebetween the radiator and person’sbody (excluding extremities: hands,wrists, feet and legs).

Co−location: This transmitter mustnot be co−located or operated in con-junction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

Steering switches

Overhead console


To increase the volume: Push “+”.To decrease the volume: Push “−”.

When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) ormore, the volume automatically increaseswithout switch adjustment. When yourspeed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), thevolume automatically returns to its originallevel.

Voice guidance volume can be changed bypushing the volume control switch on thesteering wheel.

2. Talk switch

Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−free system on and initiates the speechcommand system.

Pushing and holding the talk switch endsthe speech command system.

3. Off−hook switch

Pushing the off−hook switch turns thehands−free system on.

When receiving a call, pushing the off−hook switch allows you to talk on thephone.

—Control and features�Steering switches and microphone


214


4. On−hook switch

When the hands−free system is on, push-ing the on−hook switch turns the hands−free system off.

5. Microphone

The microphone is used when talking onthe phone or using the speech commandsystem.


215


1. Display

Displays such items as the reception lev-el, a party’s name and phone number. See“DISPLAY” described on the followingpage for further details about the display.

2. “AUDIO CTRL” knob

Turning the “AUDIO CTRL” knob displaysthe menu items, names, numbers, etc. tobe selected. To select an item, push the“AUDIO CTRL” knob. Due to safety con-cerns, the “AUDIO CTRL” knob does notfunction while the vehicle is in motion.

3. Preset buttons

Pushing the preset button displays theregistered speed dial numbers.

4. “TEXT” button

When the party’s name or phone numberis too long to be displayed, pushing andholding the “TEXT” button displays the re-maining characters.

�Audio unit


216


DISPLAY

1. Bluetooth� display

Displays when a Bluetooth� connection ismade. If there is no display, theBluetooth� connection has not been madeand communication between the phoneand system is not possible. When usingthe hands−free system, make sure that“BT” is displayed. The display is updatedin real time.

2. Reception level display

Displays the reception level of the radiowave signals. This may not match thedisplay on the cellular phone. The recep-tion level of some cellular phones may notbe displayed.

The number of bars is greater when thesignal received is stronger.

3. Message display

Displays phone numbers, names, com-ments, menu items, etc.

The phone setup menu includes the fol-lowing:

� Pair Phone

To use the hands−free system, you needto register your phone in the system.Once you have registered it, you canmake a hands−free call. Up to 6 phonescan be registered.

� Select Phone

When the system connects to Bluetooth�,the phone previously used is automaticallyselected. Select a different phone if nec-essary. Only the selected phone can beused with the hands−free system.

� Change Name

The registered phone names can bechanged.

� List Phones

The registered phone names can bechecked.

The following can be performed during thename playback:

� Select phone

� Change name

� Delete

—Phone Setup


217


� Set PassKey

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8digit code can be input as a passkey.

� Delete

The registered phones can be deleted.

To enter the phone setup menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn thehands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Setup” is displayed and push theknob.

“Setup. Please push the talk switch andsay security, or phone setup.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Phone Setup” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“Phone setup. Push the talk switch andsay pair phone, select phone, changename, list phones, set passkey or delete.”is heard.

“XXX (phone name) already selected.” isheard and “XXX (phone name)” is dis-played.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-tem may not function properly.

To pair phones

1. Push the talk switch and say “Pairphone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Pair Phone” is displayedand push the knob.

“Pair. Push the talk switch and say aname for the phone.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Re-cord Name” is displayed, push theknob and say “XXX (desired phonename)”.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Confirm” is displayed and push theknob.

“XXX Ready for phone pairing. Please usethe phone to connect it to the hands−freesystem. The passkey for the phone is....”is heard.

After “HANDS FREE” is displayed, a pass-key∗ is displayed and “Searching.” isheard.

4. Input the displayed passkey into thephone.

“The phone is paired and ready for use.Returning to the main menu.” is heard and“Paired” is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-ing cases:

� If 6 phones have already been regis-tered.

� If the vehicle is moving.

� If the system cannot communicate withthe phone.

∗: Passkey is a password required to reg-ister a phone to the system.

INFORMATION

� To use the hands−free system, youneed to register your phone in thesystem. Once you have registeredit, you can make a hands−free call.Up to 6 phones can be registered.

� For the operation of the phone, seethe manual that comes with yourcellular phone.

� The passkey can be changed. Seepage 220 for changing the passkey.


218


To select a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “Selectphone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Select Phone” is displayedand push the knob.

“Select phone. Push the talk switch andsay the phone name or say list phones.”is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedesired phone name is displayed andpush the knob.

When the phone is selected by a voicecommand:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heardand “XXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turnthe “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” isdisplayed and push the knob.

“XXX selected. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard.

When the phone is selected by usingthe knob:

“XXX selected. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard.


� If the phone is not found.

� If the system does not recognize thevoice command.

To change a name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Changename”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Change Name” is displayed andpush the knob.

“Change name. Push the talk switch andsay the phone name to change.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thephone name that you want to changeis displayed and push the knob.


219


When the phone is selected by a voicecommand:



“Push the talk switch and say a newname.” is heard.


“XXX Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.


“Name changed. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-played.

When the phone is selected by usingthe knob:





“XXX Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.


“Name changed. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-played.


� If no phone has been registered.


To list phones

1. Push the talk switch and say “Listphones”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “List Phones” is displayedand push the knob.

“List phones. To select a name, push thetalk switch during the name playback.” isheard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

“Push the talk switch and say selectphone, change name, or delete.” is heard.

Select one of the following:


220


Select phone

Push the talk switch and say “Selectphone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Select Phone” is displayed and pushthe knob.

For further details on selecting a phone,see page 218.

Change name

Push the talk switch and say “Changename”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Change Name” is displayed andpush the knob.

For further details on changing a name,see page 218.

Delete

Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Delete”is displayed and push the knob.

For further details on deleting a phone,see page 221.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-tem may not function properly.

To set a passkey

1. Push the talk switch and say “Setpasskey”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Set PassKey” is displayedand push the knob.

“Set Passkey. The passkey is required forthe phone pairing process. Push the talkswitch and say a new passkey.” is heardand passkey is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to selecta number.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switchand say confirm. Otherwise, continue add-ing numbers, or say go back or delete.”is heard and “XXXX (new passkey)” isdisplayed.


“Passkey changed. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to selecta number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”knob to set.

2. When the passkey is set, push the“AUDIO CTRL” knob.

“Passkey changed. Returning to the phonesetup.” is heard.


� If the passkey has less than 4 digits.

� If the passkey has more than 8 digits.


221


To delete a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Delete” is displayed and push theknob.

“Delete. Push the talk switch and say thephone name to delete.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thephone name you want to delete is dis-played and push the knob.




“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.


“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.


� If no phone has been registered.


The security menu includes the following:

� Set PIN (Personal Identification Num-ber)

The PIN can be set or changed.

� Phone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

When the phone book is locked, the fol-lowing functions cannot be used:

� Dial by name

� Redial

� Callback

� Speed Dial

� PhoneBook


The locked phone book can be unlocked.

—Security


222


To enter the security menu



“Setup. Please push the talk switch andsay security, or phone setup.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Security” is displayed and push theknob.

“Security. Push the talk switch and sayset PIN, phone book lock, or phone bookunlock.” is heard.

To set a PIN

Push the talk switch and say “Set PIN”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “SetPIN” is displayed and push the knob.

“There is no PIN number set. Please reg-ister a PIN number. Please push the talkswitch and say a four−digit PIN number.”is heard.


1. Push the talk switch and say “XXX(new PIN number)”.


“The PIN number has been set. Returningto the security.” is heard and “Completed”is displayed.



2. Repeat the above procedure until theentire four−digit number is set.

3. When the PIN is set, push the “AUDIOCTRL” knob.




223


If the PIN is to be changed:

“There is a PIN number in place. Pushthe talk switch and say the correct PINnumber.” is heard and “Current PIN?” isdisplayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, oruse the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to inputthe current PIN number.

“Please push the talk switch and say afour−digit PIN number.” is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX(new PIN number)”.


If the current number is not correct, thesystem does not function properly.

To lock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say “Phonebook lock”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Phbk Lock” is displayed andpush the knob.

“There is a PIN number in place. Pushthe talk switch and say the correct PINnumber.” is heard and “Current PIN?” isdisplayed.



“XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heardand “XXXX” is displayed.


“PIN number accepted. The phone book isnow locked. Returning to the main menu.”is heard and “Locked” is displayed.



2. When the PIN number is set, push the“AUDIO CTRL” knob.



“PIN number accepted. The phone book isnow locked. Returning to the main menu.”is heard and “Locked” is displayed.


224



� If the current number is not correct.

� If the phone book has already beenlocked.

� If the PIN number does not exist.

To unlock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say “Phonebook unlock”, or turn the “AUDIOCTRL” knob until “Phbk Unlock” is dis-played and push the knob.

“Phonebook unlock. There is a PIN num-ber in place. Push the talk switch and saythe correct PIN number.” is heard and“Current PIN?” is displayed.





“PIN number accepted. The phone book isnow unlocked. Returning to the mainmenu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis-played.



2. When the PIN number is set, push the“AUDIO CTRL” knob.



“PIN number accepted. The phone book isnow unlocked. Returning to the mainmenu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis-played.


� If the current number is not correct.

� If the phone book has already beenunlocked.

INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the followingfunctions is available. Enter thephone book menu, push the off−hookswitch, and say either of the follow-ing:

� Phone book lock



225


The system setup menu includes the fol-lowing:

� Adjust Guidance Volume

� Initialize

To enter the system setup menu



3. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“System Setup” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“System setup. Please select guidancevolume or initialize.” is heard.

To adjust the guidance volume

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Guidance Vol” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“Guidance will be at this volume” is heardand the present volume level is displayed.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to adjustthe volume and push the knob.

To initialize

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Initialize” is displayed and push theknob.

“System initialization. This will erase alluser information in the hands free system;including paired phones, phone book en-tries, and call history. Select confirm toinitialize. Otherwise, select go back.” isheard.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Confirm” is displayed and push theknob.

“System initialization. This will erase alluser information in the hands free system;including paired phones, phone book en-tries, and call history. Select confirm toinitialize. Otherwise, select go back.” isheard.

3. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Confirm” is displayed and push theknob.

“Initialized. Returning to the main menu.”is heard.

The phone book menu includes the follow-ing:

� Add Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can beregistered.

� Change Name

The registered names can be changed.

� Delete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

� Delete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be deleted.

� List Names

The registered names can be checked.

� Set Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set.

—System Setup —Phone Book


226


To enter the phone book menu


2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Phonebook” is displayed and push theknob.

“Phone book. Please push the talk switchand say add entry, change name, deleteentry, list names, set speed dial or deletespeed dial.” is heard.

If the phone book is locked, the systemmay not function properly.

To add entry

The add entry includes the following:

(a) By Voice

(b) By Phone

(c) Call History

(d) Manual Input

Push the talk switch and say “Add entry”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “AddEntry” is displayed and push the knob.

“Add Entry. How will the number be en-tered. Push the talk switch and say byvoice, by phone, or call history.” is heard.

(a) By voice

1. Push the talk switch and say “Byvoice”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “By Voice” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“Voice entry. Push the talk switch and saythe number.” is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say the dialnumber that you want to register.

“To store, push the talk switch and sayconfirm. Otherwise, continue adding num-bers, or say go back, or delete.” is heardand number is displayed.



227


If “Confirm” is said, then input a voicetag.

“Push the talk switch and say a name.”is heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say the nameof the dial number that you want toregister.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.


“Stored. To register this as a speed dialentry, push the talk switch and say setspeed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.” isheard and “Stored” is displayed.

3. Select one of the following:

� Confirm

� Speed Dial

Confirm

Push the talk switch and say “Confirm”, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.

Speed Dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “Setspeed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Speed Dial” is displayedand push the knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the preset button toassign to XXXX” is heard.

2. Push and hold the desired preset but-ton.

“preset... is now assigned. Returning tothe phone book.” is heard.


� If the phone book is full.

� If the dial number has more than 24digits.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “Byphone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “By Phone” is displayed andpush the knob.

“Phone entry. Prepare to send the informa-tion from the phone. When ready, pushthe talk switch and say confirm.” is heard.


“Send the information at this time.” isheard.

After the system has received the nameand phone number, “Push the talk switchand say confirm. To select an alternatenumber, say next or previous. Otherwise,say go back.” is heard and “XXX (name)”and “XXX (number)” is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions,push the talk switch and say “Confirm”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob untilthe dial number that you want to regis-ter is displayed and push the knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 226.


228


(c) Call History

1. Push the talk switch and say “Call his-tory”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Call history” is displayed andpush the knob.

“Call history. Push the talk switch and sayincoming or outgoing.” is heard and “CallHistory” is displayed.

2. Select one of the following:

� Incoming

� Outgoing

Incoming

1. Push the talk switch and say “Incom-ing”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Incoming” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“Most recent incoming call was XXXX” isheard and the incoming number is dis-played.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” isheard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to registeris displayed and push the knob.



Outgoing

1. Push the talk switch and say “Outgoin-g”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Outgoing” is displayed and pushthe knob.

“Most recent outgoing call was XXXX” isheard and the outgoing number is dis-played.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” isheard.




(d) Manual Input

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Manual Input” is displayed and pushthe knob.


3. When the number is set, push the“AUDIO CTRL” knob.



INFORMATION

� The system can recognize singledigits from zero to nine, # (pound),∗ (star) and + (plus). Numbers thatare ten or greater are not recog-nized.

� To speed up input, it is a good ideato group all digits into a continuousstring. However, you can enter eachdigit individually or group digits to-gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-eration appears on the screen as fol-lows:


229


Input operation—

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Voice output: “995 to store push thetalk switch and say confirm. Other-wise, continue adding numbers, orsay go back, or delete.”

Display: “995”

You say: “Seven, three, four”

Voice output: “734 to store push thetalk switch and say confirm. Other-wise, continue adding numbers, orsay go back, or delete.”

Display: “995734”

Repeat the above procedure until theentire number that you want to regis-ter is input.

Go back operation—

You say: “Go back”

Voice output: “Go back. The last num-bers said have been removed. Pushthe talk switch and say the number.”

Display: “995”

Repeating the above operation deletesthe last digits in reverse order of in-put.

Delete operation—

You say: “Delete”

Voice output: “Deleted. Push the talkswitch and say the number.”

Display: “Delete”

The display will return to the initialscreen that allows a number to beinput.

To list names

The voice tags can be edited during thename playback.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Listnames”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “List Names” is displayedand push the knob.

“List names. To select a name, push thetalk switch during the name playback.” isheard.


“XXXX selected.” is heard and “Selected”is displayed.

If you push the off−hook switch during thename playback, you can dial the numberof the selected name.


230


Editing the voice tags

The following can be performed:

� Dial

� Change Name

� Delete Entry

� Speed Dial

“Push the talk switch and say dial, changename, delete entry, or set speed dial.” isheard and “Selected” is displayed.

Dial

Push the talk switch and say “Dial”, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Dial”is displayed and push the knob.

Change Name

Push the talk switch and say “Changename”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Change Name” is displayed andpush the knob.


Delete Entry

Push the talk switch and say “Deleteentry”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Delete Entry” is displayed and pushthe knob.


Speed dial

Push the talk switch and say “Set speeddial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Speed Dial” is displayed and push theknob.


To delete entry

1. Push the talk switch and say “Deleteentry”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Delete Entry” is displayed andpush the knob.

“Delete entry. Push the talk switch andsay the name to delete.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thename that you want to delete is dis-played and push the knob.




“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” isheard and “Deleted” is displayed.


“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” isheard and “Deleted” is displayed.


� If no name has been registered.



231


To delete speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “Deletespeed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Del Spd Dial” is displayedand push the knob.

“Delete speed dial. Push the preset buttonto delete from speed dial.” is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you wantto delete.

“To delete preset... push the talk switchand say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.”is heard.


“Deleted.” is heard and “Deleted” is dis-played.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.


� If no speed dial has been registered.

� If the preset button has not been as-signed.

To change name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Changename”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knobuntil “Change Name” is displayed andpush the knob.

“Change name. Push the talk switch andsay the name to change.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to change isdisplayed and push the knob.





2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Re-cord Name” is displayed, push theknob and say “XXX (new name)”.



“Name changed. Returning to the phonebook.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-played.


232




1. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Re-cord Name” is displayed, push theknob and say “XXX (new name)”.



“Name changed. Returning to the phonebook.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-played.




To set speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “SetSpeed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”knob until “Speed Dial” is displayedand push the knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the talk switch andsay a name.” is heard.



“XXXX To register this as a speed dialentry, push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, push the talk switch andsay go back.” is heard and “XXXX” isdisplayed.


“Push the preset button to assign toXXXX” is heard.

2. Push and hold the desired preset but-ton.



“Push the preset button to assign toXXXX” is heard.

Push and hold the desired preset button.






233


INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the followingfunctions is available. Push the off−hook switch and talk switch, and sayone of the following:

� Phone book add entry

� Phone book change name

� Phone book delete entry

� Phone book delete speed dial

� Phone book list names

� Phone book set speed dial


� Dial

� Delete

� Store

To enter the redial


2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Redial” is displayed and push theknob.

“Redial. Most recent outgoing call wasXXXX” is heard and outgoing history isdisplayed.

“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.Otherwise, push the talk switch and saydial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”is heard.

Dial

Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thenumber that you want to dial is displayedand push the knob. After that, do the oneof the following:

� Push the off−hook switch.

� Push the talk switch and say “dial”.

� Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to delete isdisplayed and push the knob.


“Delete. Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.


“Deleted.” is heard.

—Redial


234


Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to registeris displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Store” is displayed and push the knob.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.





� If there is no outgoing history.

� If the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

� Up to five outgoing calls can bestored in the system.

� When five outgoing calls are storedin memory, the oldest outgoing callis deleted to make room in memoryfor new calls.

� Only the latest outgoing call isstored when the same telephonenumber is dialed.

� A shortcut to “Redial” is available.Push the off−hook switch twice.


� Dial

� Delete

� Store

To enter the callback


2. Follow voice guidance instructions, orturn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Callback” is displayed and push theknob.

“Callback. Most recent incoming call wasXXXX” is heard and incoming history isdisplayed.

“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.Otherwise, push the talk switch and saydial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”is heard.

—Callback


235


Dial

Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thenumber that you want to dial is displayedand push the knob. After that, do the oneof the following:


� Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.


Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to delete isdisplayed and push the knob.


“Delete. Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.


“Deleted.” is heard.

Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until thedial number that you want to registeris displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until“Store” is displayed and push the knob.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say con-firm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.





� If there is no incoming history.

� If the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

� Up to five incoming calls can bestored in the system.

� When five incoming calls are storedin memory, the oldest incoming callis deleted to make room in memoryfor new calls.

If the cellular phone is not registered, thissystem cannot be used. See page 216 forregistering a cellular phone. Make surethat “BT” is displayed and get the cellularphone ready to use.

There are 3 ways to make a phone callwith this system.

� Speed dial

A phone call can be made with a presetbutton in which a phone number is regis-tered. See page 232 for setting the presetbuttons.

� Dial by Name

The system dials the numbers correspond-ing to the spoken names registered in thesystem.

� Dial by Number

The system dials to the spoken numbers.

To make a phone call

Push the off−hook switch to turn thehands−free system on.

—Making a phone call


236


To speed dial

1. Push the preset button where the de-sired number is set. The name or tele-phone number is displayed.

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.

To dial by Name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial byname”.

“Dial by name. Please push the talkswitch and say the stored name, or saylist names.” is heard and “Dial by Name”is displayed.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX”,or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob untilthe phone name that you want to dialis displayed and push the knob.


“XXXX Push the off−hook switch to dial.Otherwise, push the talk switch and saydial, or go back.” is heard. After that, dothe one of the following:





It calls the number.


� If there is no number registered in thepreset button.


INFORMATION

� The phone numbers registered inthe phone book can be retrieved.

� The system does not recognize thatthe voice tag is not registered inthe registered cellular phone. Fordetails about voice tags, see “Toadd entry” on page 226.

� A shortcut to “Dial by name” isavailable. Push the talk switch andsay “Dial XXX (name you want todial)”.


237


To dial by Number

1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial byNumber”.

“Dial by number. Please push the talkswitch and say the number.” is heard and“Dial by Num” is displayed.

2. Push talk switch and say “XXXX”.

“Push the off−hook switch to dial. Other-wise, push the talk switch and say dial,go back, or delete.” is heard.

To dial the number, do the one of thefollowing:




If the number exceeds 24 digits, the sys-tem may not function properly.

INFORMATION

� The system can recognize singledigits from zero to nine, # (pound),∗ (star) and + (plus). Numbers thatare ten or greater are not recog-nized.

� To speed up input, it is a good ideato group all digits into a continuousstring. However, you can enter eachdigit individually or group digits to-gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-eration appears on the screen as fol-lows:

Input operation—

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Voice output: “995 push the off−hookswitch to dial. Otherwise, push thetalk switch and say dial, go back, ordelete.”

Display: “995”

You say: “Seven, three, four”

Voice output: “734 push the off−hookswitch to dial. Otherwise, push thetalk switch and say dial, go back, ordelete.”

Display: “995734”

Repeat the above procedure until theentire number that you want to dial isinput.

Go back operation—

You say: “Go back”

Voice output: “Go back, the last num-bers entered have been removed.Push the talk switch and continueadding numbers otherwise say dial,go back, or delete.”

Display: “995”

Repeating the above operation deletesthe last digits in reverse order of in-put.

Delete operation—

You say: “Delete”

Voice output: “Deleted. The entirenumber to dial has been deleted.Please push the talk switch and saythe number.”

Display: “Dial by Num”

The display will return to the initialscreen that allows a number to beinput.


238


Cancel operation—

Do either one of the following:

� Push the on−hook switch at anytimeduring the operation.

� Push the talk switch and say “Can-cel” after the beep at anytime dur-ing the operation except while a callis connected.

When receiving a phone call, a ring toneis audible and the system changes intothe telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, the displayis as follows. The display differs depend-ing on whether or not the vehicle is inmotion.

When the vehicle is stopped:Number, name or “Incoming” is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:“Incoming” is displayed.

Do either one of the following:

� Pushing the off−hook switch allows youto talk on the phone.

� Pushing the on−hook switch refusesthe call.

To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”on the steering volume controls. Volumeadjustment cannot be done using the au-dio system.

Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steeringvolume controls mutes the ring.

When receiving an international phonecall, the name of the party may not bedisplayed correctly depending on the cellu-lar phone.

To transfer a call to the phone:

The received call can be transferred fromthe hands−free system to the cellularphone that is connected to Bluetooth�. Fordetails, refer to the user’s guide for thecellular phone.

—Receiving a phone call


239


While talking on the phone, the display isas follows. The display differs dependingon whether or not the vehicle is in motion.

When the vehicle is stopped:Number is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:“Talking” is displayed.

When the call is finished, push the on−hook switch.

In the following situations, your voice maynot reach the party.

� Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If you talk at the sametime, the voice may not reach eachother. (It is not a malfunction.)

� Keep the volume of receiving voicedown. Otherwise, echo is coming up.When you talk on the phone, speakclearly towards the microphone.

� When driving on a rough road.

� When driving at high speeds.

� When the window is open.

� When the air conditioning vents facethe microphone.

� When the sound of the air conditioningfan is loud.

To transfer a call from the phone:

Pushing the off−hook switch while talkingon the cellular phone that is connected toBluetooth� allows you to talk hands−free.

To transfer a call to the phone:

The call can be transferred from thehands−free system to the phone that isconnected to Bluetooth�. For details, referto the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

—Talking on the phone


240


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemAutomatic air conditioning system

Controls 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climate remote controls 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side and rear vents 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9


241


1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “DUAL” button indicatoron—individual setting on driver sideonly)(with “DUAL” button indicatoroff—simultaneous setting on driver andfront passenger)

2. Fan speed selector

3. Air flow selector button

4. Temperature selector (“PASS TEMP”)(individual setting on front passengerside only)

5. “A/C” button

6. Air intake selector

7. Windshield air flow button

8. “OFF” button

9. “AUTO” button

Automatic air conditioning system——Controls


242


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. The“AUTO” button will turn on, indicating thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Push the “�” (increase) or “�” (decrease)side of the button to adjust the fan speed.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

“DUAL” button

Push the button to change the mode ofthe temperature setting.

With the indicator on—Individual temper-ature setting for driver and front passen-gerWith the indicator off—Simultaneoustemperature setting for driver and frontpassenger

Temperature selectors

Turn the knob to adjust the temperatu-re—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

—“TEMP” knob

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—Thisknob changes the temperature on the driv-er side only.

With the “DUAL” button indicator off—Thisknob changes the temperature on the driv-er side and front passenger side simulta-neously. This function will be cancelledwhen the “PASS TEMP” knob is turned.

—“PASS TEMP” knob

This knob changes the temperature on thefront passenger side only.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.


243


Air flow selector button

Push the button to select the vents usedfor air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents and the rearvents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents, the instrument panel vents andthe rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to selectFRESH automatically. This is to clean upthe front view more quickly. It is not pos-sible to return to RECIRCULATE in thismode.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

When the “POWER” switch is set at ONafter the 12 volt battery is reconnected,the indicator light on the button may flashand a motor sound may be heard. Thisdoes not indicate a malfunction.


244


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is on)—Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Drawsoutside air into the system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

PlasmaclusterTM∗

The PlasmaclusterTM∗ helps to keepgood air quality in the cabin by emitingpositive and negative ions into the cab-in.

Operating the air conditioning system al-lows positive and negative ions to comeout from the driver’s side vent.

A low noise may be heard during opera-tion. This is not a malfunction.

Static electricity may be discharged nearthe driver’s side vent because high volt-age is used to operate the system.

To clean the driver’s side vent, wipe thevent using a soft cloth after turning thesystem off.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or repair the sys-tem because it contains high voltageparts. Call your Toyota dealer if thesystem needs repair.


245


NOTICE

Do not insert anything into the driv-er’s side vent, attach anything to it,or use sprays around the driver’s sidevent. These things may cause the sys-tem not to work properly.

∗: This system adopts the plasmaclustertechnology, manufactured under licensefrom SHARP Corporation. “PlasmaclusterTM”is a trademark of SHARP Corporation.

“ECO HEAT/COOL” switch

Push the “ECO HEAT/COOL” switch toselect the “ECO HEAT/COOL” (economi-cal) mode of the air conditioning. The indi-cator on the switch comes on and “ECO”appears on the air conditioning display toindicate that the mode is on.

The efficiency of the air conditioning islimited because the consumption of elec-tricity is reduced, achieving a reduction offuel consumption. As a result, it may takelonger than the usual amount of time forthe inside air temperature to reach the settemperature.

The “ECO HEAT/COOL” mode is canceledin the following cases:

� The temperature control is set at “LO”(the lowest temperature) or “HI” (thehighest temperature).

� The air flow is set in the floor/wind-shield mode or windshield mode.

� “ECO HEAT/COOL” switch is pushedagain.


246


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips


247


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards WARMAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has been war-med.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLDAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.


248


Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLDAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield


—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperatureto heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly. It is not possible toreturn to RECIRCULATE in this mode.


� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield


—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly. It is not possible toreturn to RECIRCULATE in this mode.


249



� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Some parts of the air conditioning systemcan be adjusted using the switches on thesteering wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “DUAL” button indicatoron—individual setting on driver sideonly)(with “DUAL” button indicatoroff—simultaneous setting on driver andfront passenger)

2. “AUTO” button

3. “OFF” button

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. The“AUTO” button will turn on, indicating thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, press the“�” side. To decrease it, press the “�”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side only.

Climate remote controls(steering switches)


250


With the “DUAL” button indicator off—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side and front passenger side si-multaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the“PASS TEMP” knob on the instrument pan-el is turned.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

Side vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side and rear vents. The side and rearvents may be opened or closed as shown.

Side and rear vents


251


The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed inside of the glove boxas shown and indicates that a filter hasbeen installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to becleaned or replaced if the air flow ofthe air conditioning and heater experi-ences extreme reductions in operatingefficiency, or if the windows begin tofog up easily in FRESH mode.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect, clean and replace the air condi-tioning filter according to the maintenanceschedule. In dusty areas or areas withheavy traffic flow, such as inner city ordesert areas, early replacement may berequired. (For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.)

Air conditioning filter—

—Checking, cleaning andreplacing the air conditioningfilter


252


1. Open the glove box, and slide offthe damper as shown.

2. Apply pressure to the glove box asshown to disengage the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover while push-ing in both ends of the cover.


253


4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be cleaned or re-placed.

To clean the filter, blow compressed airthrough it from the bottom.

Hold the air gun 50 mm (2 in.) from thefilter and blow for approximately 2 minutesat 500 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 72 psi).

If it is not available, have the filtercleaned by your Toyota dealer.

When inserting the filter in the filteroutlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the air condi-tioning system, do the following.

� When using the air conditioningsystem, make sure that a filter isalways installed.

� When cleaning the filter, do notclean the filter with water.


254


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentTrip information 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable ashtray 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front cup holder 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holder 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 10


255


1. Push the “INFO” button to displaythe “Information” screen.

2. Touch the “Trip information” on thescreen.

Trip information appears on the screen.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the screenwill be reduced.

You can adjust the brightness of thescreen. To adjust the brightness, see the“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” forthe procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the screen while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to operatethe screen only when the vehicle isstopped.

Trip information (with navigation system)


256


Consumption screen

1. Transition of fuel consumption in thepast 30 minutes

2. Regenerated energy in the past 30minutes

3. Best fuel economy among average

4. Cruising range

5. Average fuel consumption

The information listed above is dis-played when you touch the “Consump-tion” switch on the “Energy Monitor”screen.

The displayed values on the screen indi-cate general driving conditions. Accuracyvaries with driving habits and road condi-tions.

When the “POWER” switch is set at ON,the last previously used mode displayedjust before the “POWER” switch is turnedoff will appear.

If “Reset All” is touched, all of the graph-ics and values except the cruising rangewill be reset.

If the electrical power source is discon-nected from the navigation system screen,the screen will automatically be set to theinitial mode.

1. Fuel consumption in the past 30minutes(“Consumption”)

The transition of fuel consumption inthe past 30 minutes is displayed in thegraph.

2. Regenerated energy in the past 30minutes

The regenerated energy in the past 30minutes is indicated with symbols.

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 4symbols will be shown. The energy of 50Wh illuminates a 50 W bulb for an hour.

3. Best fuel economy (lowest fuel con-sumption) among average (“Best”)

Best fuel economy among average isdisplayed.

If the average fuel consumption is resetby touching the “Reset” and the averagefuel consumption is the lowest, the valueis overwritten.

4. Cruising range (“Cruising Range”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The cruising range display indicates theapproximate distance that you can driveuntil the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It isdifferent from the actual distance traveled.

If the fuel gauge malfunctions, the mileagefigure will not appear.


257


When the vehicle is refueled, the drivingrange is recalculated.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger than indicated. If fuel consumptionis poor, the driving range will be shorterthan indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comeson, refuel the vehicle even if the displayindicates that the vehicle can be drivenfurther.

5. Average fuel consumption (“Average”)

Average fuel consumption is displayedbased on total driving distance and to-tal fuel consumption.

The calculation is reset by touching the“Reset”. If the average fuel consumptionis the lowest, the value of the best fueleconomy among average is overwritten.

Energy Monitor screen

Touching the “Energy” switch turns onthe “Energy Monitor” that displays thehybrid system operating condition.

The arrow on the screen indicates themovement of the energy. See “Energymonitor” on page 3 for the representativescreen.

The segments of the battery on thescreen indicate the status of the hybridbattery. See “—Hybrid battery status” onpage 5 for details.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The “POWER” switch must be set at ACCor ON.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time indi-cator will be reduced.

Clock


258


The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the “POWER” switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the “POWER”switch is turned on.

Push the “AUTO” switch for longer than 3seconds to turn the compass system onand off.

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

� The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The “POWER” switch is turned off im-mediately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

� The 12 volt battery has been discon-nected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

Compass


259


The compass sensor is in the insiderear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,then push and hold the switch until thezone number appears on the display.

Then push the switch, referring to the fol-lowing map to select the number of thezone where the vehicle is.


260


Zone numbers

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


261


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push andhold the switch until “C” appears on thedisplay.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the 12 volt battery has been re-moved, replaced or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.


262


CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Front console

Center console

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The “POWER” switch must be set at ACCor ON for the power outlet to be used.

Front console power outlet—Connectedcables can be passed through the hole tothe front passenger side of the auxiliarybox. For details, see “Auxiliary boxes” onpage 268 in this Section.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W.

� To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not use thepower outlets longer than necessarywhen the hybrid system is turnedoff.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets


263


Buttons

Indicator light

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink� and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink�

The HomeLink� in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

HomeLink�

Hand−heldgaragetransmitter

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

Garage door opener


264


3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink�” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.


265


The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink�

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver call the:

� Toyota Customer Experience Center at1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

� Toyota Canada Customer InteractionCentre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)


266


Refer to HomeLink� on the internet at:WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICrules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

The ashtray can be removed and usedoutside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,raise the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.

The cup holder lid cannot be closed whilethe ashtray is installed.

To detach the ashtray, pull it out.

Portable ashtray


267


CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the mechanical key andturning it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the mechanical keyand turning it counterclockwise.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglove box is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box


268


Auxiliary boxes


269


To use the boxes, open it as shown theillustration.

1. Driver’s side instrument panel

2. Overhead console

3. Front console

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

NOTICE

Overhead console box—During hotweather, the interior of the vehiclebecomes very hot. Do not leave any-thing flammable or deformable suchas a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

CABLE PASS−THROUGH

The auxiliary box of the front console isprovided with a hole that allows cables tobe passed into the cabin from the insidepower outlet and AUX adapter.

To open the hole, perform the followingprocedure:

1. Remove the lid on the inside of theauxiliary box.

2. From the inside of the auxiliary box,push out and remove the outer lid.

Be careful not to lose the removed lids.


270


To open the console box, push the lockrelease button and raise the consolebox lid.

The upper tray slides forward/backwardand can be removed.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely. To usethem, open it as shown in the illustra-tion.

The adapter for front cup holder is detach-able. Replace it in its original positionwhen using the front cup holder. Other-wise the drinks will not be held securely.

Rear console box Front cup holder


271


CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, keep the cup holderclosed when it is not in use.

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely. To use it,pull down the armrest.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� Do not lift the armrest upright whenthe cup holder is in use.

This hook is designed to hang thingslike grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging heavy loads on it.

Rear cup holder Grocery bag hooks


272


To secure belongings, hang the cargonet on the hooks.

NOTICE

� Do not use the net to secure sharpor heavy objects. The net will tearoff.

� Be sure not to twist the net whenhooking.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat havetwo holes, then they are designed for usewith locking clips. Attach the floor mat tothe vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Cargo net Floor mat


273



274


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak−in period 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric power steering system 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


275


Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the hybrid system.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than 87 may result in engineknocking. Persistent knocking can lead toengine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break−in period Fuel


276


GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emisvels. Inthe U.S., category 4 has been adopted.The WWFC improves air quality by pro-viding for better emissions in vehiclefleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.


277


NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveability problems are encoun-tered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,engine knock, etc.), discontinue theuse.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that may burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

Operation in foreign countries Three−way catalytic converters


278


NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not turn the “POWER” switchoff while the vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

� Do not apply a coating agent suchas an anti−rust under−coating to theexhaust pipe.

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the hybrid system in agarage or enclosed area except forthe time needed to drive the vehiclein or out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the hybrid sys-tem operating. If it is unavoidable,however, do so only in an uncon-fined area and adjust the heating orcooling system to force outside airinto the vehicle.

Engine exhaust cautions


279


� Keep the trunk lid closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed trunklid may cause exhaust gases to bedrawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the trunk lid to ensure plentyof fresh air enters the vehicle. Ifyou can smell exhaust fumes eventhough there are no other vehiclesin the surrounding area, have yourvehicle checked by your Toyotadealer. Continued inhalation of ex-haust fumes can lead to death bygas poisoning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600miles)

Facts about engine oilconsumption


280


When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an express way, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 355 in Section 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-mance or smooth driveability.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs


281


REGENERATIVE BRAKE

When the brake is applied, the motor gen-erator converts kinetic energy into electricenergy.

When applying brakes, you may hear asound coming from the motor generator.However, this does not indicate anytrouble.

The regenerative brake works in the fol-lowing operations.

1. When the accelerator pedal is released,the reduced speed equal to enginebraking in a gasoline−fueled vehicle isobtained in accordance with the runningmode position of the selector lever.

2. When the brake pedal is depressedwith the selector lever in “D” or “B”,the regenerative brake works.

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

This brake system has 3 independent hy-draulic circuits. If any circuit should fail,the other will still work. However, the ped-al will be harder to press, and your stop-ping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle if any hy-draulic circuit has failed. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE ACTUATOR

The brake actuator uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power−assist thebrakes. If the brake actuator fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and the buzzer sounds continu-ously. In this case, the brakes may notwork properly. If they do not work well,depress the brake pedal firmly. If thebrake system warning light comes on, im-mediately stop your vehicle and contactyour Toyota dealer.

The red and yellow brake system warninglights may stay on for about 60 secondsafter the hybrid system is turned on. It isnormal if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red warning light andbuzzer. It is normal if the light turns offafter a few seconds.

In the following conditions, you may heara sound in the engine compartment. Thisis not a malfunction.

� The driver’s door is opened with thehybrid system turned off.

� The brake pedal is depressed with thehybrid system turned off.

� After the hybrid system is turned on.

� The brake pedal is depressed repeated-ly with the hybrid system turned on.

� After the hybrid system is turned off.

The brake pedal may be hard to depressor the brake pedal stroke may be shortbefore turning the hybrid system on. Thisis not a malfunction.

Brake system


282


CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if thehybrid system is not operating.Each push on the pedal uses upyour reserved brake fluid pressure.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

Driving conditions where the steeringwheel must be turned frequently maycause an overload to the electric powersteering system. The system will reduceassistance for sometime to prevent thepower steering from overheating. In thiscase, you may feel some resistance whenturning the steering wheel though it is nota malfunction.

CAUTION

If the “P/S” warning light comes on,take your vehicle to the Toyota dealeras soon as possible. In this case, youmay feel the heavy steering wheelmaneuvering. Drive your vehicle whilegripping the steering wheel firmly.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Electric power steering systemBrake pad wear limitindicators


283


The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

1. Engine number2. Traction motor number

The engine and traction motor numbersare stamped as shown.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber

—Engine and traction motornumbers


284


Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous vehicle handlingcharacteristics, resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Theft prevention labels Suspension and chassis


285


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 289.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 288.

3. Uniform tire quality gra-ding—For details, see “UniformTire Quality Grading” that follows.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators—For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 362.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols (standard tire)


286


7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 362.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 385.

10.Summer tire or all seasontire—An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 298.


287


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page319.

2. Tire size—For details, see “—Tiresize” on page 289.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)—For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 288.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators—For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 362.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 362.

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)


288


6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 385.

7. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


289


This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


290


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform Tire QualityGrading


291


Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


292


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are availableas factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


293



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two


294



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


295


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 359.Total load capacity:

410 kg (900 lb.)Total load capacity means com-bined weight of occupants, cargoand luggage. Tongue load is in-cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)Seating capacity means the maxi-mum number of occupants whoseestimated average weight is 68 kg(150 lb.) per person. Depending onthe weight of each person, the seat-ing capacity given may exceed thetotal load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity: Toyota does not recommend towinga trailer with your vehicle. It is not de-signed for trailer towing.Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “Capacity and distribution”that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the trunk

when at all possible. Be sure allitems are secured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

Vehicle load limitsCargo and luggage——Stowage precautions


296


CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the enlarged trunk. Keep car-go and luggage low, as closeto the floor as possible.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe enlarged trunk. It is not de-signed for passengers. Theyshould ride in their seats withtheir seat belts properly fas-tened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� Do not place anything on thepackage tray behind the rearseatback. Such items may bethrown about and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle dur-ing sudden braking or an acci-dent.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

—Capacity and distribution


297


(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 310.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 410 kg (900 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:410 kg – 166 kg = 244 kg.(900 lb. – 366 lb. = 534 lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:244 kg – 176 kg = 68 kg.(534 lb. – 388 lb. = 146 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 295.


298


CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 285.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originally equippedtires and wheels.

Types of tires


299



300


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingPreparing to start the hybrid system 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the hybrid system 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving and parking using smart key system 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 311. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


301


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore getting in.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, seat height, headrestraint height and steering wheelangle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all side doors and back door.

5. Fasten seat belts.

When you get in the vehicle, checkwhether the “READY” light is on ornot.

CAUTION

Your vehicle does not produce anynoise or vibration when the vehicle isready to be driven with the “READY”indicator light on. Move your footcarefully from the brake pedal to theacceleration pedal when driving.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

As the hybrid system can be started onlywith the transmission in the “P” position,put the selector lever in “P” wheneverstarting the system.

PUSH BUTTON START FUNCTION

The hybrid system can be started bypressing the “POWER” switch.

Before starting the hybrid system, be sureto follow the instructions in “(a) Beforestarting”.

Starting procedure

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,press the “POWER” switch briefly andfirmly. The “READY” light starts flashingand then it stays on with sounding abeep. If the ambient temperature is low,such as during winter driving conditions,it may take longer than the usual amountof time until the “READY” light stays on.

Preparing to start the hybridsystem

How to start the hybridsystem—(a) Before starting (b) Starting the hybrid system


302


The engine may not start even with the“READY” light on.

If there is a problem somewhere in thehybrid system, the message “CHECKHYBRID SYSTEM” will appear on themulti−information display. Have yourvehicle checked by your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

If the hybrid system will not start...

In the following cases, the hybrid systemwill not start.

� If a buzzer sounds from the vehicle,and the message “KEY IS NOTDETECTED” appears on the multi−infor-mation display and the master warninglight comes on when pressing the“POWER” switch, this indicates that thekey is not in the vehicle.

� If the key is placed in the trunk, thehybrid system cannot be started.

� There are instances in which the hybridsystem will not start, even if the keyis in the vehicle (e.g. on the floor, inthe cup holder or glove box).

When the push button start functiondoes not operate properly, the followingmay be causes:

� The key battery may be discharged ifthe electronic key does not work.

You can start the hybrid system bytouching the Toyota logo side of theelectronic key to the “POWER” switch.For details, see “Smart key system” onpage 32 in Section 1−2.

Replace the key battery as soon aspossible. (See “—Replacing battery” onpage 30 in Section 1−2.)

� The hybrid system was repeatedlyturned on and off over a short period.

Wait 10 seconds and then start thehybrid system.


303


� If the green indicator light on the“POWER” switch flashes, and the mes-sage “S/T IS NOT UNLOCKED” ap-pears on the multi−information displayand the master warning light comes on,the steering wheel is locked.

To free the steering lock, turn thesteering wheel slightly while pressingthe “POWER” switch.

� If the amber indicator light on the“POWER” switch flashes, and the mes-sage “CHECK S/T LOCK” appears onthe multi−information display and themaster warning light comes on, there isa problem in the steering lock function.

Contact your Toyota dealer, and haveyour vehicle and all keys inspected.

� If the amber indicator light on the“POWER” switch flashes, and no mes-sage appears on the multi−informationdisplay, there is a problem in the pushbutton start function.

Contact your Toyota dealer, and haveyour vehicle and all keys inspected.

� In addition to the above, there areinstances in which the smart key sys-tem does not operate properly becauseof the circumstances of use. For de-tails, see “Smart key system” on page32 in Section 1−2.

In cases other than those describedabove, it is possible that a problem hasoccurred in an area other than the startsystem. See “If your vehicle will not start”on page 313 in Section 4.

If the 12 volt battery is disconnected orrun down...

The “READY” light will not come on andthe hybrid system will not start after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In this case, perform the following proce-dure to restart the hybrid system:

1. Turn the hybrid system off.

2. Open and close the driver’s door.

3. Press the “POWER” switch briefly andfirmly.

If the hybrid system still will not start,contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system fromoutside the vehicle, or an accidentmay occur. Be sure to sit in the driv-er seat, then start the system.


304


NOTICE

� If any message appears on the mul-ti−information display or service re-minder indicator light comes on(see page 140 and page 150 in Sec-tion 1−6 for details) or the 12 voltbattery is disconnected, the hybridsystem may not be started. In thatcase, push the “POWER” switchagain. If the “READY” light doesnot come on, contact your Toyotadealer.

� When you start the hybrid systemat a lower outside temperature, itmay take longer before the blinking“READY” light changes to constanton.

TIPS FOR USING SMART KEY SYSTEM

When using the smart key system, it ispossible to start or stop the hybrid systemas long as the key is on your person.

For this reason, it is possible that a pas-senger may remove the key from the ve-hicle without the driver being aware of thefact. In such a case, it is not possible torestart the hybrid system after havingturned it off. In addition, it is possible thatone may get out of the vehicle withoutbeing aware that the “POWER” switch hasnot been turned off completely.

When driving or getting in or out of thevehicle, drivers should make sure thatthey are carrying the key.

CAUTION

Do not touch the “POWER” switchwhile driving.

If you have to make an emergency stop,press and hold the “POWER” switch formore than 3 seconds.

Master warning light and multi−informa-tion display

SYSTEM FUNCTION REMINDERS

Follow the instructions described below ifany of the following warnings occur:

(A) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster when the“POWER” switch is pushed.

This indicates that the driver has gotteninto the vehicle without the key. The mes-sage “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” will alsoappear on the multi−information displayand the master warning light will come on.

Operate the “POWER” switch only aftertaking care that the key is in the vehicle.

Driving and parking usingsmart key system


305


If the warning light is still lit when the keyis in the vehicle, the key battery is dis-charged. Check that the indicator light onthe key comes on by pushing the lockbutton on the key. When the indicator lightdoes not come on, change the key batteryso that smart key system works properly.

(B) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster, accompaniedby three warning sounds from thevehicle when the driver gets out ofthe vehicle and closes the door.

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto leave the vehicle carrying the key with“POWER” switch turned off although thetransmission selector lever has been setin the “P” position. The message “KEY ISNOT DETECTED” will also appear on themulti−information display and the masterwarning light will come on.

Get out of the vehicle only after turningoff the hybrid system by pressing the“POWER” switch and checking that theindicator light on the “POWER” switch hasgone off. If the driver returns to the ve-hicle without carrying the key and beginsdriving, a warning buzzer will sound oncemore.

(C) A warning buzzer sounds from thevehicle for two seconds after lockingthe door with the door handleswitch.

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto lock the doors while carrying the key,neglecting to follow the instructions forcase (B) above.

Lock the doors only after turning off thehybrid system by pressing the “POWER”switch and checking that the indicator lighton the “POWER” switch has gone off.

A warning buzzer that sounds even thoughthe engine has been turned off indicatesthat driver is attempting to lock the ve-hicle with the keys still in the vehicle.

Leave the vehicle only after making surethat you are carrying the key.

(D) A warning buzzer sounds continu-ously from the instrument clusterwhen opening the driver’s door.

This indicates that the transmission selec-tor lever is in a position other than “P”and that the “POWER” switch is notturned off. The message “SHIFT TO PRANGE” will also appear on the multi−in-formation display.

Get out of the vehicle only after settingthe transmission selector lever in the “P”position, turning off the hybrid system bypressing the “POWER” switch andchecking that the indicator light on the“POWER” switch has gone off.


306


(E) A warning buzzer sounds continu-ously from the instrument clusterand from the vehicle when closingthe door after getting out of the ve-hicle.

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto leave the vehicle carrying the key, ne-glecting to follow the instructions for case(D) above. The messages, “SHIFT TO PRANGE” and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED”,will also appear alternately on the multi−information display and the master warn-ing light will come on.

Get out of the vehicle only after settingthe transmission selector lever in the “P”position, turning off the hybrid system bypressing the “POWER” switch andchecking that the indicator light on the“POWER” switch has gone off.

(F) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster and threetimes from the vehicle when a pas-senger is getting out of the vehicle.

This indicates that the passenger isattempting to leave the vehicle carryingthe key, without turning the hybrid systemoff. The message “KEY IS NOTDETECTED” will also appear on themulti−information display and the masterwarning light will come on.

When passengers get out of the vehicle,care should be taken to leave the keywith the driver. If the driver begins drivingafter a passenger gets out of the vehiclecarrying the key, a warning buzzer willsound once more.

(G) A warning buzzer sounds from thevehicle for two seconds when lock-ing the vehicle from the outside withthe door handle switch.

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto lock the door with the key still in thevehicle.

Leave the vehicle only after making surethat you are carrying the key.

(H) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster when the“POWER” switch is turned off.

This indicates that the key battery is low.(This warning buzzer sounds only whenthe hybrid system has been on or the“POWER” switch has been set at ON for20 minutes or more.) The message “LOWKEY BATTERY” will also appear on themulti−information display.

Change the key battery ahead of time inorder to ensure that the smart key systemworks properly.

(I) A warning buzzer sounds repeatedlyfrom the instrument cluster whenopening the driver’s door with the“POWER” switch turned off.

This indicates that the steering wheel isnot locked. Turn the engine off and thenopen the door in order to lock the steeringwheel.


307


(J) The “POWER” switch flashes greenonce every second.

This indicates that the steering lock isstuck. The message “S/T IS NOTUNLOCKED” will also appear on themulti−information display.

To free it, rotate the steering wheel slight-ly while pressing the “POWER” switch.

(K) The “POWER” switch flashes amberonce every 2 seconds.

When the message “CHECK S/T LOCK”appears on the multi−information display—This indicates a problem with the steeringlock function. Have your vehicle checkedat your Toyota dealer.

When no message appears on the multi−information display—This indicates a problem with the pushbutton start function. Have your vehiclechecked at your Toyota dealer.

THEFT PREVENTION FUNCTION

� When the hybrid system is turned off,the engine immobilizer system is auto-matically set. (See “Engine immobilizersystem” on page 24 in Section 1−2.)

� When the driver’s door is opened afterturning off the hybrid system, the steer-ing wheel will lock.

When the 12 volt battery is discharged,the steering lock function may not op-erate properly.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

Tips for driving in variousconditions


308


� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the hybrid system isoperating.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and use enginebrake. Remember, if you ride thebrakes excessively, they may over-heat and not work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, en-gine braking or braking on a slip-pery surface. Sudden accelerationor engine braking could cause thevehicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.


309


Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the coolant level” on page357 in Section 7−2 for details of coolanttype selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the 12 volt bat-tery and cables.

Cold temperatures lower the performanceof the 12 volt battery, so it must be in topshape to provide enough power for winterstarting. Section 7−3 tells you how tovisually inspect the 12 volt battery. YourToyota dealer and most service stationswill be pleased to check the level ofcharge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 356 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Winter driving tips


310


Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Toyota does not recommend towing atrailer with your Toyota. Toyota alsodoes not recommend the installation ofa tow hitch or the use of a tow hitchcarrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bi-cycle, etc. Your Toyota is not designedfor trailer towing or for the use of towhitch mounted carriers.

Dinghy towing Trailer towing


311


Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page359 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the hybrid system,causing greater fuel consumption.

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� When parking, be sure to put thetransmission into the “P” position. Inthe “N” position, the engine operatesbut electricity cannot be generated. Thehybrid battery will be discharged requir-ing unnecessary engine power to re-charge.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe hybrid system, which, in turn,wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the hybrid system tocoast down hills. Your power steeringand brake booster do not functionwhen the hybrid system is off. Inaddition, the emission control systemoperates properly only when the hy-brid system is operating.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


312


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your hybrid system stalls while driving 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift transmission selector lever 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4


313


Before making these checks, make sureyou have sufficient fuel and that you havefollowed the correct starting procedure giv-en in “How to start the hybrid system” onpage 301 in Section 3. If your vehicle isequipped with the engine immobilizer sys-tem, also check whether the other keyswill start the hybrid system. If they work,your key may be broken. Have the keychecked at your Toyota dealer. If none ofyour keys work, there may be a malfunc-tion in the immobilizer system. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page 22 inSection 1−2.)

If the instrument cluster displays withnormal brightness levels with the“POWER” switch set at ON...

You may try emergency start. See “(b)Emergency start” for further instructions.

If the instrument cluster dims or theinstrument cluster display turns offwith the “POWER” switch set at ON...

1. Check that the 12 volt battery terminalsare tight and clean.

2. If the 12 volt battery terminals areO.K., the 12 volt battery is discharged.You may try jump starting. See “(c)Jump starting” that follows for furtherinstructions.

NOTICE

Hybrid vehicles cannot be push−started.

When the hybrid system cannot bestarted, the following procedure can beused if the hybrid system and “POWER”switch function normally.

1. Put the transmission in “P”.

2. Set the mode to ACC by pushing the“POWER” switch once.

3. Push and hold the “POWER” switch forabout 15 seconds while depressing thebrake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be startedusing the above procedure, the systemmay be malfunctioning. Have the vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer.

If the hybrid system cannot be startedusing the above procedure, immediatelycontact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not place any objects close to the“POWER” switch. If the object pusheson the switch, the hybrid system maybe started unexpectedly.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Emergency start


314


If the 12 volt battery is discharged, thehybrid system can be started by jumpstarting. Depending on the vehicle con-dition, however, the hybrid system maynot start.

To avoid serious injury and damage toyour vehicle which might result from anexplosion of the battery, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, follow instructions careful-ly.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

12 VOLT BATTERY LOCATION

The 12 volt battery is located in the right−hand side of the trunk. Remove the coverto access the battery.

(c) Jump starting


315


JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster battery. Lay a clothover the open vents on the battery.(This helps reduce the explosion haz-ard, personal injuries and burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

Discharged battery

Boosterbattery

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

Jumper cablePositive terminal(“+”mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the discharged 12 volt bat-tery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

BoosterbatteryDischarged battery

Negative terminal (“−”mark)

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.


316


The recommended connecting pointis in the above illustration.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Start the hybrid system. Make sure the“READY” light is on.

If the ”READY” light will not come onand the hybrid system will not startafter you recharge the battery, performthe following procedure. Turn the hybridsystem off. Open and close the driver’sdoor. Then push the ”POWER” switchbriefly and firmly.

If the the message “LOW T. BATTERYSTOP THE VEHICLE SHIFT TO P” ap-pears on the multi−information display,the hybrid battery is also discharged.In this condition, the hybrid systemmay not start. Contact your Toyotadealer.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of the 12 volt battery dis-charging is not apparent (for example,lights left on), have the battery checkedby your Toyota dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart the hybridsystem in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.


317


If your hybrid system stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Set the “POWER” switch at ACC or off,and try starting the hybrid systemagain.

If the hybrid system will not start, see “Ifyour vehicle will not start” on page 313 inthis Section.

CAUTION

� If the hybrid system is not operat-ing, the power assist for the brakesand steering will not work so steer-ing and braking will be much hard-er than usual.

� If the hybrid system stalls whiledriving, do not open the driver’sdoor until the vehicle comes to acomplete stop. Opening the driver’sdoor locks the steering wheel, re-sulting in loss of steering control.

Any of the following may indicate thatthe hybrid system has overheated:

� The engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating.

� The message “WATER TEMP” or“HYBRID SYSTEM OVER HEAT” ap-pears on the multi−information dis-play.

� A loss of power is experienced.

� A loud knocking or pinging noise isheard.

If the hybrid system overheats, followthe procedures below:

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the hybridsystem. Wait until the steam subsidesbefore opening the hood. If there is nocoolant boiling over or steam, leave thehybrid system turned on and makesure the electric cooling fan is operat-ing. If it is not, turn the hybrid systemoff.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is on, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the hy-brid system immediately. Call a Toyotadealer for assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the hy-brid system is on. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 357 in Section 7−2.

If your hybrid system stallswhile driving If your vehicle overheats


318


CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the hybrid system and ra-diator are hot. Serious injury couldresult from scalding hot fluid andsteam blown out under pressure.

6. After the coolant temperature hascooled to normal, again check the cool-ant level in the reservoir. If necessary,bring it up to half full again. Seriouscoolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the hybrid system and turnon your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start the hybrid systemwhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

If you have a flat tire—


319


� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” moldedinto the side wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.


320


The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page362 in Section 7−2 for details on thetread wear indicators and other ser-vice information.

CAUTION

� The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your Toy-ota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

� Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

� The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).

� Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

� Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

� Avoid sudden acceleration,sudden deceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unpaved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Jack handle2. Wheel nut wrench3. Transport eyelet

(on some models)4.Jack 5.Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

—Required tools and sparetire


321


To remove the spare tire:1. Loosen the nut and remove it.2. Remove the spare tire cover.3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.4. Remove the jack tray.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.

When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

Before removing the jack, unhook thetightening strap.After storing the jack, make sure it issecurely held by the tightening strap.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.


322


2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block or equivalent in front ofone of the front wheels or behind oneof the rear wheels.

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may be-come loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident.

—Blocking the wheel —Loosening wheel nuts


323


4. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

Jack point guide

The jack point guides are located un-der the rocker panel. They indicatethe jack point positions.

5. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle


324


CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

6. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

—Changing wheels


325


7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

8. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench totighten the nuts. Do not use othertools or any additional leverage otherthan your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure thewrench is securely engaged over thenut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle


326


CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

� Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

9. Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designed on page 385 in Sec-tion 8. If the pressure is lower, driveslowly to the nearest service stationand fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.10.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 385 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tiresor wheels. See “Tire pressurewarning system” on page 168 inSection 1−7.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

—After changing wheels


327


If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Avoid spinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

If your vehicle becomes stuckIf your vehicle needs to betowed—


328


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

CAUTION

If your vehicle needs to be towed, doit with the front wheels raised. If thewheels with the motor generator areon the ground when towing, the mo-tor may continue to generate electrici-ty. This may cause the electricity lea-kage. Depending on the severity ofthe damage, electricity leakage maycause fire.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From front—Release the parking brake.

From rear—

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

(c) Towing with slingtype truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.


329


If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Make sure the hybrid system isturned off and the parking brake ison. Insert the flathead screwdriver orequivalent to the slot of the coverand pry it up.

2. Press the “POWER” switch and startthe hybrid system. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

3. With pushing down the shift lockoverride button, shift out of the “P”position while depressing the brakepedal.

As the hybrid system starts only with thetransmission in the “P” position, put theselector lever in “P” whenever starting thesystem.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shifttransmission selector lever


330


You can purchase a new electronic keyat your Toyota dealer if you can givethem the key number and master key.

If you lose any of your keys, contact yourToyota dealer to have new keys made.Lost keys increase the danger of vehicletheft. Bring all of the remaining vehiclekeys when you visit your Toyota dealer.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 22 in Section 1−2.

You can use the wireless remote controlfunction and smart entry and start functionby new key. Contact your Toyota dealerfor detailed information.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you lose your keys


331



332


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


333


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 334 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


334


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Your Toyota is a hybrid vehicle. Payparticular attention when washing yourToyota.

NOTICE

Before washing your Toyota, be sureto observe the following in order toavoid the risk of damage to your ve-hicle.

Do not splash water on the electriccomponents in the engine compart-ment. This may cause malfunction ofthe electric components.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

� When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

� Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


335


2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

� Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.


336


Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

CAUTION

� Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in seriousinjury.

� Do not wash the vehicle interior ortrunk with water. The hybrid batteryis located behind the rear seat andallowing water to come into contactwith the battery can cause electricshock that may result in death orserious injury.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Cleaning the interior


337


Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console paneland switches.

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentioned a-bove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.


338


Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.


339



340


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 345. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


341


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to insure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

Maintenance requirements


342


What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 346 inSection 7.

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if the hybrid systemis operating.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 373 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe full and low lines on the see−throughreservoir when the hybrid system is cold.See page 357 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt or insects. See page 358 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 359 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 355 in Section7−2 for additional information.

General maintenance


343


Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 278 in Section 2.

IN THE TRUNK

12 volt battery conditionSee page 369 in Section 7−3 for addition-al information.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelBe alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraints move up and downsmoothly and that the locks hold securelyin any latched position. For folding−downrear seatbacks, check that the latcheslock securely.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure that thebelt webbings not cut, frayed, worn ordamaged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Transmission “Park” mechanismCheck the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors including trunk lidoperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.


344


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 359 in Section 7−2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page362 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 364 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Coolant temperature continuously high-er than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


345


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when the12 volt battery is disconnected or rundown, the codes are erased. Also, de-pending on your driving habits, the codesmay not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


346


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1


347


1. Brake fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Coolant reservoir (for inverter, tractionmotor and motor generator)

5. Radiator (for engine)

6. Fuse block

7. Condenser

8. Electric cooling fans

9. Radiator (for inverter, traction motorand motor generator)

10. Windshield washer fluid tank

11. Coolant reservoir (for engine)

Engine compartment overview


348


Spare fusesIf you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 351 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Fuse locationsDo−it−yourself serviceprecautions


349


CAUTION

� Never touch, remove or disassemblehigh voltage parts and cables.Touching, removing or disassem-bling those parts and cables cancause severe burns or electricshock that may result in death orserious injury. For the locations ofhigh voltage parts and cables, see“—High voltage components” onpage 7 in Section 1−1.

� When the hybrid system is on, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan. (Removingrings, watches, and ties is advis-able.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the radiator is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� When the hybrid system is operat-ing with the “READY” light on, theengine may suddenly start in somecases. When you inspect the enginecompartment, be sure to turn offthe hybrid system.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the POWER” switch isoff if you work near the electriccooling fans or radiator grille. Withthe “POWER” switch on, the elec-tric cooling fans will automaticallystart to run if the engine coolanttemperature is high and/or the airconditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Brake fluid can harm your hands oreyes and damage painted surfaces.If fluid gets on your hands or inyour eyes, flush the affected areawith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with yourhands or eyes, go to the doctor.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the 12 volt battery. It con-tains poisonous and corrosivesulfuric acid.


350


NOTICE

� Remember that the 12 volt batteryand ignition cables carry high cur-rents or voltages. Be careful of ac-cidentally causing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−silicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

Rear

Positioning the jack


351


When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start the hybrid systemwhile your vehicle is supported bythe jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 356 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

Parts and tools


352


CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING 12 VOLT BATTERY CON-DITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent withsame amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 373 inSection 7−3.)


353



354


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the coolant level 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2


355


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the hybrid system at operatingtemperature and turned off, check theoil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the hybrid system, wait a few min-utes for the oil to drain back into thebottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level line, add engine oilof the same type as already in the en-gine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.1 L (1.2 qt., 1.0 Imp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 382 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


356


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may beused. However, SAE 0W−20 is the bestchoice for good fuel economy and goodstarting in cold weather.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.


357


Coolant reservoir for engine

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the hybrid system is cold.The coolant level is satisfactory if it isbetween the “F” and “L” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add thecoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith the hybrid system temperature. How-ever, if the level is on or below the “L”line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the“F” line.

Coolant reservoir for inverter, traction mo-tor and motor generator

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the hybrid system is cold.The coolant level is satisfactory if it isbetween the “FULL” and “LOW” lineson the reservoir. If the level is low, addcoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith the hybrid system temperature. How-ever, if the level is on or below the “LOW”line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the“FULL” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, coolant filler cap, radiatorcap and drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the hy-brid system is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

Checking the coolant level


358


For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your coolantsystem with proper usage. “Toyota SuperLong Life Coolant” is formulated withlong−life hybrid organic acid technologyand has been specifically designed toavoid cooling system malfunction onToyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when they may be hot afterdriving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking the radiator andcondenser


359


To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.

If the level is low, take your vehicle toa Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Donot drive your vehicle if the red brakesystem warning light is on. Call aToyota dealer for assistance.

If the fluid level goes down soon afteryour vehicle is serviced, it may indicatea serious mechanical problem. Haveyour vehicle checked by a Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Brake fluid can harm your hands oreyes. If fluid gets on your hands orin your eyes, flush the affected areawith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with yourhands or eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle,be sure to wipe it off to prevent dam-age to parts or paint.

Type A

Checking brake fluidChecking tire inflationpressure


360


Type B

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 385 and 380. Theyare also on the tire and loading infor-mation label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.


361


� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.


362


CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from a

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

Checking and replacing tires


363


The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 285 and 283.


364


CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page318 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 168 in Section 1−7.

To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.

Rotating tires


365


See “If you have a flat tire” on page318 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 168 in Section 1−7.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Do not use snow tires other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires you shouldstore them in a cool dry place. Mark thedirection of rotation and be sure to installthem in the same direction when replac-ing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Installing snow tires andchains


366


Side chain

Cross chain

Use the following type chains.

mm (in.)A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.


367


WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 168in Section 1−7.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions


368


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking 12 volt battery condition 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt battery recharging precautions 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the fusible link 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3


369


A 12 volt battery is located in theright−hand side of the trunk. Removethe cover to access the battery.

The battery with a flammable hydrogengas exhaust valve is specially desig-nated for your vehicle. When replacingthe battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

� When replacing the battery, onlyinstall a battery designated for yourhybrid vehicle. Using a conventionalbattery may cause hydrogen gas tobuild up in the vehicle.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Checking 12 volt batterycondition——12 volt battery location —Precautions


370


Hold−downclamp

Ground cable

Terminals

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

NOTICE

� Be sure the hybrid system and allaccessories are off before perform-ing maintenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while thehybrid system is operating. Also, besure all accessories are turned off.

—Checking the 12 volt batteryexterior

12 volt battery rechargingprecautions


371


Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type CIf the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 348 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the hybrid system and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 386 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type B fuses—When any of the fuses areblown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing fuses


372


Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “RADIONO.1” or “PWR OUTLET” fuse, which maybe dispensable for normal driving, and useit if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and the fusesare O.K., check the fusible link fittedon the “+” terminal of the 12 volt bat-tery. If the link is melted, it must bereplaced.

If there is an overload in the circuits, thefusible links are designed to melt beforethe entire wiring harness is damaged.

The battery is located in the right−handside of the trunk. See “—12 volt batterylocation” on page 369 in this Section.

Checking the fusible link


373


If the washer does not work or themessage “LOW WASHER FLUID” ap-pears on the multi−information display,the washer tank may be empty. Addwasher fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the hybrid system andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The stop/tail lights and high mounted stop-light consist of a number of LEDs. If anyof the LEDs burn out, take your vehicleto your Toyota dealer to have the lightreplaced.

If two or more LEDs in a stop light burnout, your vehicle may not conform to locallaws (SAE).

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—


374


Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights(high)

9005 60 A

Headlights (low) — 55 B

Front sidemarker lights

— 5 C

Front turnsignal/parkinglights

3457NAK 30/8 D

Rear turn signallights

— 21 D

License platelights

— 5 C

Back−up lights 921 16 C

Personal lights — 5 C

Interior light — 8 E

Door courtesylights

168 5 C

Vanity lights — 8 C

Glove box light — 1.2 C

Trunk light — 3.8 C

A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbsC: Wedge base bulbs (clear)D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Double end bulbs

If the front turn signal/parking, sidemarker, tail or back−up lights, or highmounted stoplight burns out, contactyour Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front turnsignal/parking, side marker, tail, back−up light and high mounted stoplightbulbs by yourself. You may damagethe vehicle.

—Front turn signal/parking,side marker, tail and back−uplights, and high mountedstoplight


375


Low beam (outside)

High beam(inside)

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

The above illustration shows the left−handheadlight.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connec-tor and install it into the mountinghole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights


376


—Rear turn signal lights


377



379


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction motor 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid battery 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8


380


Model:2AZ−FXE

Type:

4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

88.5 � 96.0 (3.48 � 3.78)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):2362 (144.1)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗ mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

∗: Unladen vehicle

1470 (57.9)

4805 (189.2)

1820 (71.7)

2775 (109.3)

1575 (62.0)

1565 (61.6)

410 (900)

Engine


381


Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):65 (17.2, 14.3)

Type:Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output:105 kW

Maximum torque:270 N·m (27.5 kgf·m, 199 ft·lbf)

Type:Nickel−Metal hydride battery

Voltage:7.2 V/module

Capacity:6.5 Ah

Quantity:34 modules

Overall voltage:244.8 V

Fuel Traction motor Hybrid battery


382


ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Intake 0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)Exhaust 0.38—0.48 (0.015—0.019)

Spark plug type:

DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm(in.):1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE

Use only above spark plugs. Do notadjust gaps for engine performance orsmooth driveability.

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)Without filter 4.1 (4.3, 3.6)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Engine6.2 (6.6, 5.5)

Inverter, traction motor and motor gener-ator

2.9 (3.1, 2.6)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

Service specifications


383


12 VOLT BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

CAUTION

When replacing the battery, onlyinstall a battery designated for yourhybrid vehicle. Using a conventionalbattery may cause hydrogen gas tobuild up in the vehicle.

TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

3.8 (4.0, 3.3)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change the transmission fluid only as nec-essary.

Generally, it is necessary to changetransmission fluid only if your vehicle isdriven under one of the Special OperatingConditions listed in your “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”. When changing thetransmission fluid, use only “ToyotaGenuine ATF WS” (ATF JWS3324 orNWS9638) to aid in assuring optimumtransaxle performance.

Notice: Using transmission fluid otherthan “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” maycause deterioration in shift quality,locking up of your transmission accom-panied by vibration, and ultimately dam-age the transmission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.


384


BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the hybrid system operating, mm(in.):

80 (3.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 1—2 (0.04—0.08)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake

Parking brake adjustment when de-pressed with the force of 300 N (31 kgf,67 lbf):

7—10 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)


385


Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:Front and rear kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel size

P215/60R16 94V 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 � 6 1/2 J

When driving under the above vehicle conditions at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countrieswhere such speeds are permitted by−law, inflate the front and rear tires to 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 35 psi) providedthat it does not exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.Spare kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel size

T155/70D17 110M 420 (4.2, 60) 420 (4.2, 60) 17 � 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 359 through 367, in Section 7−2.

Tires


386


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. AM2 7.5 A: “POWER” switch

2. ABS MAIN No.2 10 A: Electronicallycontrolled brake system



5. BATT FAN 10 A: Hybrid battery fan

6. ETCS 10 A: Electronic throttle controlsystem

7. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights

8. IG2 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, starting system, “GAUGENO.2”, “IGN” and “INJ” fuses

9. STR LOCK 20 A: Steering lock system

10. DOME 10 A: Gages and meters, vanitylights, trunk light, “POWER” switchlight, door courtesy lights, interior light,personal lights, clock, smart keysystem

11. ECU−B NO.1 10 A: Front passengeroccupant classification system, mainbody ECU

12. RADIO NO.1 15 A: Audio system, nav-igation system

13. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Main body ECU,power door lock

14. IGCT 30 A: Hybrid system ECU,“PWR”, “IGCT No.2” and “INV W/P”fuses

15. AMP 25 A: Audio system

16. EFI MAIN 30 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, electronic throttle controlsystem and “EFI NO.3” fuses

17. EFI NO.3 10 A: Fuel tank system, mul-tiport fuel injection system/sequentialmultiport fuel injection system

18. IGCT NO.2 10 A: Hybrid system ECU,motor generator ECU

19. INV W/P 15 A: Hybrid system ECU,traction battery, DC/DC converter, mul-tiport fuel injection system/sequentialmultiport fuel injection system

20. S−HORN 7.5 A: No circuit

21. A/F 20 A: No circuit

22. MPX−B 10 A: Gauges and meters

23. EFI NO.1 10 A: Smart key system

24. HORN 10 A: Horns

25. H−LP(RL) 15 A: Right−hand headlight(low beam)

Fuses


387


26. H−LP(LL) 15 A: Left−hand headlight(low beam)

27. H−LP(RH) 15 A: Right−hand headlight(high beam)

28. H−LP(LH) 15 A: Left−hand headlight(high beam)

29. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system

30. HTR SUB2 50 A: PTC heater

31. HTR SUB1 50 A: PTC heater

32. RR DEF 50 A: Rear window defogger,“MIR HTR” fuse

33. CDS FAN 40 A: Electric cooling fans

34. RDI FAN 40 A: Electric cooling fans

35. DC/DC 120 A: “ABS MTR2”, “EPS”,“ABS MTR”, “AM2”, DOOR NO.1”,“ETCS”, “IG2”, “HAZ”, “AMP”, “ABSMAIN1”, “ABS MAIN2”, “STR LOCK”,“ABS MAIN3”, “BTT FAN”, “EFI MAIN”,“EFI NO.1” and “IGCT” fuses

36. EPS 80 A: Electric power steering sys-tem

37. ABS MTR2 40 A: Electronically con-trolled brake system

38. ABS MTR1 50 A: Electronically con-trolled brake system

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. RR DOOR RH 25 A: Rear right powerwindow

2. RR DOOR LH 25 A: Rear left powerwindow

3. FUEL OPN 7.5 A: Fuel fillter dooropening system

4. FR FOG 15 A: No circuit

5. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

6. ECU−B NO.2 7.5 A: No circuit

7. STOP 10 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, shift lock control system,multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system, mainbody ECU, electronically controlledbrake system, electronic throttle controlsystem

8. TI&TE 30 A: No circuit

9. AM1 7.5 A: Starting system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

10. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system

11. PWR 25 A: Power windows

12. DOOR NO.2 25 A: Main body ECU

13. S/ROOF 30 A: Electric moon roof

14. TAIL 15 A: Front side marker lights,tail lights, rear side marker lights, li-cense plate lights

15. PANEL 7.5 A: Navigation system, seatheaters, emergency flashers, air condi-tioning system, audio system, glovebox light, instrument panel lights, steer-ing switches, clock

16. ECU IG NO.1 10 A: Main body ECU,push start system, electric moon roof,auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror,tire pressure warning system, naviga-tion system


388


17. ECU IG NO.2 7.5 A: Electronicallycontrolled brake system, electric powersteering system, shift lock control sys-tem

18. A/C NO.2 10 A: Air conditioning sys-tem, rear window defogger

19. WASH 10 A: Windshield wipers andwasher

20. S−HTR 20 A: Seat heaters

21. GAUGE NO.1 10 A: Emergency flash-ers, back−up lights

22. WIP 25 A: Windshield wipers andwasher

23. H−LP LVL 7.5 A: No circuit

24. INJ 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

25. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, SRS airbag system, steeringlock system, front passenger occupantclassification system, smart key sys-tem, electronic throttle control system

26. GAUGE NO.2 7.5 A: Gages and me-ters, clock

27. ECU−ACC 7.5 A: Clock, main bodyECU, shift lock control system, outsiderear view mirrors, smart key system,push start system

28. CIG 20 A: No circuit

29. PWR OUTLET 20 A: Power outlet

30. RADIO NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system,navigation system

31. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-ror defoggers

32. 30 A: Power windows

33. 30 A: Power seats


389


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9


390


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll−free at1−888−327−4236 (TTY: 1−800−424−9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners


i


ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: � When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331� Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: � When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.� The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com� Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com� Canada www.toyota.ca

© 2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.



Publication No. OM33749UPart No. 01999-33749Printed in Japan 01−0612−00

Hybrid ( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 150. . . . . . . .

� If a message appears 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your hybrid system stalls while driving 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If a road accident occurs 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the hybrid system 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) orhigher.

See page 275 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 356 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 359 through 367.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 385.

AU 4

I


ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


iii


Important information about your Toyota

Hybrid system on your vehicle

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics dif-ferent from other conventional vehicles. You must under-stand the characteristics of your vehicle very well and han-dle it carefully. Read this manual and follow the instruc-tions. Section 1−1 explains the characteristics of the hy-brid system.

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.


iv


The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head, chest and knee injuries by preventingcontact of the head, chest and knee with interior portionsof the vehicle.

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to anairbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body hasbeen placed between the occupant and the airbag at thetime of deployment. This is just one example of how theinstructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will helpensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.


v


Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device may recordsome or all of the following information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification

� SRS airbag deployment data

� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situationswhich include activating the VSC under which the VSCEDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR mayrecord some or all of the following information:

� Behavior of the vehicle

� Steering wheel angle

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� To what extent the brake pedal was applied

� To what extent the ECU controlled the condition ofthe 4 wheels

� Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.


vi


Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.


vii


Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery∗ posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

∗: The 12 volt battery for the hybrid vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.


viii


Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobile two−wayradio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as Toyotahybrid system, cruise control system, electronically con-trolled brake system, vehicle dynamics integrated manage-ment, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner sys-tem, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer forprecautionary measures or special instructions regardinginstallation.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehiclesemit approximately the same amount of electromag-netic waves as the conventional gasoline poweredvehicles or home electronic appliances despite oftheir electromagnetic shieldings.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of themobile two−way radio.


ix


Smart key system

Users of any electrical medical devices such as im-planted pacemakers should consult the manufacturer ofthe device for information about its operation under theinfluence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unex-pected effects on the operation of such medical devices.For details, see “Keys” on page 22 in Section 1−2.

Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 359 and 295.

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the hybridsystem is turned off. So you may hear sound coming fromunderneath the trunk for several minutes. It does not indi-cate a malfunction.

Hybrid battery

The hybrid battery has a limited service life. Call yourToyota dealer or a qualified service shop for informationabout recycling or disposal of the battery.


x


Scrapping of your Toyota

CAUTION

In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of,make sure to contact your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop. If your vehicle is disposed ofwithout the hybrid battery having been removed,there is a danger of serious electric shock if highvoltage parts, cables and their connectors are tou-ched. The hybrid batteries must be disposed of byyour Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If thetraction batteries are not disposed of properly, theymay cause electric shock that can result a death orserious injury.

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

High voltage cautions

CAUTION

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems aswell as a 12−volt system. DC and AC high voltageis very dangerous and can cause severe burns andelectric shock that may result in death or seriousinjury.

� Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace thehigh voltage parts, cables and their connectors.High voltage parts and cables are indicated in theillustration on page 7. Touching, disassembling, re-moving or replacing those parts and cables cancause severe burns or electric shock that may re-sult in death or serious injury.

� Never try to open the service plug access holelocated in the trunk. The service plug is used onlywhen the vehicle is serviced and is subject tohigh voltage. Touching the service plug can causesevere burns or electric shock that may result indeath or serious injury.


xi


� The hybrid system uses high voltage up to 650 V.The system can be hot while and after starting. Becareful of both the high voltage and the high tem-perature. Obey the caution labels attached to thevehicle.

Road accident cautions

CAUTION

� Pull your vehicle off the road, put the transmis-sion in the “P” position, apply the parking brake,turn the hybrid system off and carry the key.

� In order to avoid death or serious injury, do nottouch high voltage wiring, connectors or high volt-age parts (inverter unit, hybrid battery and etc.).High voltage parts and cables are indicated in theillustration on page 7.

� If exposed electric wires are protruding inside oroutside of your vehicle, an electric shock may oc-cur. Never touch the electric wires.

� If fluid leaks or gets into some parts of the ve-hicle, never touch it because it may be strong al-kaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery. If it con-tacts your skin or eyes, wash it off immediatelywith a large amount of water or if possible, boricacid solution. Get immediate medical attention inorder to help avoid serious injury.


xii


� If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave thevehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire ex-tinguisher that is not meant for use on electricfires. Using a small amount of water may be alsodangerous.

� If your vehicle needs to be towed, do it with thefront wheels raised. If the wheels with the motorgenerator are on the ground when towing, the mo-tor may continue to generate electricity. This maycause the electricity leakage. Depending on the se-verity of the damage, electricity leakage maycause fire. See “If your vehicle needs to betowed” on page 327 in Section 4.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.These components may include airbag, seat belt preten-sioners, and wireless remote control batteries.



You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

Hybrid vehicles contain high voltage parts and cables that are extremely dangerous and may cause severe injury oreven death if handled improperly. Only technicians who have participated in technical training for the inspectionand servicing of high voltage systems are qualified to do maintenance work on components related to the vehicle’shybrid system. For repair of your hybrid system, visit your Toyota dealer or other qualified technicians.



Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for CAMRY may be purchased

from any Toyota dealer or the Material Distribu-

tion Center. To purchase the repair manual, please

contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material Dis-tribution Center toll−free at 1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to preventsmall problems from growing into larger ones later on.The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenanceis required and clearly explains how to do the workyourself step−by−step.Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.



WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

Documents

SECTION 1 - Dealer E Process